User Manual For Agrolux 4.80

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 247

USE AND MAINTENANCE

AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001
AGROLUX 50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001
AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001
AGROLUX 70 E ->D10S653WT1E1001
AGROLUX 4.80 E
->D10S714WT1E10001

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 1 08/02/2013 21.04.38


307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 2 08/02/2013 21.04.38
USE AND MAINTENANCE

AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001
AGROLUX 50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001
AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001
AGROLUX 70 E ->D10S653WT1E1001
AGROLUX 4.80 E
->D10S714WT1E10001

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 1 08/02/2013 21.04.38


307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 2 08/02/2013 21.04.38
PREFACE
PREFACE
This manual describes the operation and maintenance of your tractor in its most generic and common configuration. The standard
configuration of the tractor and its equipment may vary from country to country. For further information on the equipment packages
available in your market, please contact your nearest dealer.
Follow the instructions provided in this manual carefully.
Should you need any further clarification regarding the contents of this manual, please do not hesitate to contact one of our service
centres, which will gladly provide you with any information you need in order to operate and maintain your loader correctly and safely
and thus avoid risk of personal injury or damage.
The manufacturer declines all liability for damage caused by operations performed but not envisaged in this document; or for any
damage derived from the improper use of the tractor or lack of expertise in performing maintenance operations, or failure to follow
the prescribed procedures.
This Operation and Maintenance Manual constitutes an integral part of the tractor.
It must therefore be kept with care and, if one day you decide to resell the tractor, please hand over this manual to the new owner.
Important
WARNING
Always consult your dealer before carry out any modifications to the tractor. Any unauthorised modifications to the
machine shall automatically release the manufacturer from all liability for any resulting damage or injury.

1. Do NOT attempt to operate the tractor without having first read and understood this manual. It is the responsibility of the pur-
chaser and of the user to read this Operation and Maintenance Manual and to follow the safety recommendations, operating
and maintenance instructions herein.
2. Make sure that you are familiar with all the safety instructions on the warning notices represented in this manual and on the
tractor. If you do not understand any of the instructions, contact your authorised dealer to obtain further clarification.
3. If this tractor is to be lent or hired out to anyone, it is the owner’s responsibility to ensure that any prospective users have read
and fully understood the Operation and Maintenance manual before using the tractor, and that they have received suitable
instruction on the safe and correct use of the vehicle.
4. The operator is responsible for carrying out a daily inspection of the tractor and its maintenance and must make sure that any
parts are repaired or renewed when their continued use could render the tractor unsafe or when they could damage or cause
the premature wear of other components. NEVER attempt to carry out repairs or adjustments unless fully competent.
5. When renewing parts, it is essential to use original parts only. The use of NON original parts, in addition to invalidating the
manufacturer’s warranty, could cause extensive damage to the tractor.
6. This tractor has been designed to be used in various agricultural applications. Any use of the tractor for an application for
which it is not intended shall be deemed incorrect use. The manufacturer accepts no liability for any damage or injuries sus-
tained as a result of the incorrect use of the tractor.

Warnings
Since the production process may be modified subsequent to the printing of this manual, the instructions, illustrations, specifications
or other information in this manual may not correspond exactly to your tractor.
In any event the manufacturer reserves the right to apply modifications to the product at any time without notice.
Handover of the tractor to the customer
l Ensure that the customer is aware of the important safety instructions contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
l Indicate to the client the importance of observing current standards, regarding above all speed of operation and braking sys-
tems for trailers.
l Provide detailed explanations of the instructions given in the handbook on using the controls, transmission, digital display,
maintenance, starting and stopping the tractor, using components such as the lift, and front and rear PTO.

To the owner of the new tractor


Practical experience in the field is the key to the success of your new tractor, as regards both its design and manufacture. For many
years, our tractors have been used for the widest range of applications in all possible conditions. However even the best products
require proper care and maintenance from the user.
To obtain the best performance from your tractor, read this manual carefully before starting work or carrying out any maintenance.
Make sure that you understand the meaning of all the warning notices on the tractor and the safety instructions contained in this
manual. Keep this manual ready to hand for consultation whenever a problem or query arises. Do not attempt to make any repairs or

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 1 08/02/2013 21.04.40


PREFACE
adjustments unless you fully understand the correct procedure and the implications. Always contact your dealer if you require further
information or assistance.
This manual has been prepared with the aim of helping the owner and/or operator to carry out all the operations related to the
the ope-
ope�
ration and maintenance of the tractor.
This manual has been divided up into different main sections as follows:
l Introduction
l Identification
l Safety
l Getting to know the tractor
l Using the tractor
l Parking the tractor
l Routine maintenance
l Fault diagnosis
l Wheels
l Electrical equipment
l Technical data
An index of the subjects dealt with in the various sections is found at the start of the Manual.
An alphabetical index is provided at the end of the Manual.
The indications in the manual regarding left, right, front and rear refer to the point of view of the operator sitting in the operator’s seat.
Consequently, the right and left sides of the tractor correspond respectively to the right and left side of the driving seat.

II

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 2 08/02/2013 21.04.40


CONTENTS
Preface I
Important I
Warnings I
Handover of the tractor to the customer I
To the owner of the new tractor I

1 - IDENTIFICATION
1.1 - List of model serial numbers 1-2
1.2 � Identification plates 1�3
1.2.1 � Tractor identification plate 1�3
1.2.2 - Tractor serial number 1-3
1.2.3 - Engine number 1-3
1.2.4 � Engine identification plate 1�4
1.2.5 � Roll bar identification plate 1�4
1.3 - Original spare parts 1-5

2 - SAFETY
2.1 - Introduction 2-2
2.2 � Practical advice on safe working procedures 2�3
2.2.1 � Protect the Environment 2�3
2.3 - General safety rules 2-4
2.4 � Accident prevention and personal safety 2�7
2.4.1 � Safety clothing and equipment 2�7
2.4.2 � Exposure to noise 2�7
2.4.3 - Boarding and alighting from the tractor 2-8
2.4.4 � Parking the tractor 2�8
2.4.5 - Cleaning the tractor 2-9
2.5 - Operation 2-10
2.5.1 � Checking indicator lights 2�10
2.5.2 � Starting fluids 2�10
2.5.3 � Auxiliary equipment 2�10
2.5.4 � Towing safely 2�11
2.5.5 � Driving on the road 2�11
2.5.6 � Overturning 2�12
2.6 � Protective structure and seat belt 2�14
2.6.1 � Roll�over protective structure (R.O.P.S.) 2�14
2.6.2 - Seat belt 2-14
2.7 - Repairs and maintenance in safety 2-15
2.8 - Emergency stop 2-16
2.9 � Safety warning notices 2�17
2.9.1 � Adhesive safety warning decals 2�17

3 - GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR


3.1 � Exterior views of the tractor 3�2
3.1.1 � External views of the tractor 3�2
3.2 � Access to the driving position 3�4

III

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 3 08/02/2013 21.04.41


CONTENTS
3.2.1 � Access to the driving position 3�4
3.3 - Operator seat 3-5
3.3.1 - Operator seats 3-5
3.3.2 � CMVR seat 3�5
3.3.3 � “KAB XH2” seat 3�6
3.3.4 � GRAMMER MSG83/721” seat with mechanical suspension and PVC upholstery 3�7
3.3.5 - Passenger seats 3-9
3.3.6 - Seat belt 3-9
3.4 � Rear�view mirrors 3�11
3.4.1 � External rear�view mirrors 3�11
3.5 - Instruments and tractor controls 3-13
3.5.1 - Instruments and tractor controls 3-13
3.5.2 - Instrument panel 3-15
3.5.3 � Console switches 3�19
3.5.4 - Right-hand console 3-21
3.5.5 � Protective structure and seat belt 3�22
3.5.6 � Hazard warning triangle 3�23
3.5.7 � Wheel chock 3�23
3.5.8 � Tool box 3�24
3.6 - Other controls 3-25
3.6.1 - Control pedals 3-25
3.6.2 - Clutch control pedal 3-25
3.6.3 � Brake pedal 3�25
3.6.4 � Parking brake lever 3�26
3.6.5 - Accelerator pedal 3-27
3.6.6 � Mechanical hand throttle lever 3�27
3.6.7 - Transmission controls 3-28

4 - USING THE TRACTOR


4.1 - Introduction 4-2
4.1.1 � Engine � first 50 operating hours 4�2
4.2 - Starting - Stopping the engine 4-3
4.2.1 � Starting the engine (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E
�>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
�>D10S653WT1E1001) 4�3
4.2.2 � Starting the engine (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 4�5
4.2.3 - Stopping the engine 4-7
4.2.4 - Dismounting from the tractor safely 4-8
4.2.5 - Turbocharging using the turbocharger 4-8
4.3 - Transmission 4-10
4.3.1 - Transmission 4-10
4.4 � Four�wheel drive � Differential lock 4�11
4.4.1 � Engaging front�wheel drive 4�11
4.4.2 � Front and rear differential locks 4�11
4.5 � Braking 4�13
4.5.1 � Brakes, “SEPARATE BRAKES” Valve 4�13
4.6 - Rear PTO 4-15
IV

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 4 08/02/2013 21.04.43


CONTENTS
4.6.1 - Rear PTO 4-15
4.6.2 � Coupling and uncoupling of PTO�driven implements 4�19
4.7 � Hydraulic rear lift 4�21
4.7.1 � Hydraulic lift 4�21
4.7.2 � Rear lift with mechanical “LOAD SENSING” control 4�21
4.8 � 3�point linkage 4�25
4.8.1 � 3�point linkage 4�25
4.9 � Hydraulic system 4�28
4.9.1 � Hydraulic system (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E
�>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
�>D10S653WT1E1001) 4�28
4.9.2 � Hydraulic system (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 4�28
4.9.3 � Auxiliary hydraulic control valve 4�28
4.9.4 � Types of remote control valve (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50
E �>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
�>D10S653WT1E1001) 4�30
4.9.5 � Types of remote control valve (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 4�31
4.9.6 � Remote valve controls (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E
�>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
�>D10S653WT1E1001) 4�32
4.9.7 � Remote valve controls (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 4�33
4.9.8 � Correspondence between the control levers and the rear hydraulic couplers (AGROLUX
45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E
�>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001) 4�34
4.9.9 � Correspondence between the control levers and the hydraulic service couplers (AGROLUX
4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 4�35
4.9.10 � Remote control valve operation 4�35
4.10 � Towing devices 4�40
4.10.1 � Towing devices 4�40
4.10.2 � Category “A” drawbar” 4�41
4.10.3 � Class “C” towing hitch 4�41
4.10.4 � Class “C” towing hitch with rapid height adjustment 4�41
4.10.5 � “EEC” towing hitch 4�42
4.10.6 � “EEC” automatic towing hitch 4�44
4.10.7 � Category II drilled drawbar 4�46
4.10.8 � Front towing hitch 4�46

5 - STORING THE TRACTOR


5.1 - Operations prior to long term garaging 5-2
5.2 � Preparing the tractor for use after a long period of inactivity 5�3

6 - MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.1 - Maintenance operations 6-2
6.1.1 � Maintenance intervals 6�3
6.1.2 � Washing the tractor/attached implements 6�3
6.2 � Fluids / lubricants and fill volumes 6�4
6.3 � Service intervals 6�6

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 5 08/02/2013 21.04.43


CONTENTS
6.4 � Maintenance and inspection schedule (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX
50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
�>D10S653WT1E1001) 6�7
6.5 � Maintenance and inspection schedule (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6�9
6.6 - Accessing the engine compartment 6-11
6.6.1 - Accessing the engine compartment 6-11
6.7 � Daily intervention 6�12
6.7.1 - General inspection of the tractor 6-12
6.7.2 � Checking the engine oil level 6�12
6.7.3 � Checking the coolant level (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50
E �>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
�>D10S653WT1E1001) 6�13
6.7.4 � Checking the coolant level (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6�13
6.7.5 � Checking the fuel level (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E
�>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
�>D10S653WT1E1001) 6�13
6.7.6 � Checking the fuel level (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6�14
6.7.7 � Check the electrical system 6�16
6.7.8 � Checking the protective structure and seat belt 6�17
6.8 � Maintenance every 50 hours 6�18
6.8.1 � Checking the transmission oil level 6�18
6.8.2 � Grease the rear axle 6�19
6.8.3 � Greasing the pivot system of the 2WD front axle 6�19
6.8.4 � Grease the 4WD front axle 6�20
6.8.5 � Checking brake reservoir oil level 6�21
6.8.6 � Check the battery 6�21
6.8.7 � Greasing the rear 3�point linkage 6�22
6.8.8 � Checking wheels and tyres 6�22
6.9 � Maintenance at 100 hours (1st service) 6�23
6.9.1 � Checking the braking distance 6�23
6.9.2 � Checking engine drivebelt tension 6�23
6.9.3 - Changing the engine oil 6-24
6.9.4 � Changing the engine oil filter cartridge 6�25
6.9.5 � Checking and cleaning the radiator (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX
50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
�>D10S653WT1E1001) 6�26
6.9.6 � Checking and cleaning the radiator (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6�27
6.9.7 � Changing the fuel filter cartridges (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX
50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
�>D10S653WT1E1001) 6�27
6.9.8 � Changing the fuel filter (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6�29
6.9.9 � Changing the gearbox oil filter (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX
50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
�>D10S653WT1E1001) 6�30
6.9.10 � Changing the transmission oil filters (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6�31
6.9.11 � Checking the parking brake lever 6�33
6.9.12 � Checking the oil pipelines 6�33

VI

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 6 08/02/2013 21.04.43


CONTENTS
6.10 � Maintenance every 300 hours 6�34
6.10.1 � Checking the front axle oil level (4WD) 6�34
6.10.2 � Adjusting the clutch pedal 6�34
6.11 � Maintenance every 600 hours 6�36
6.11.1 � Set engine valves clearance and fuel injectors 6�36
6.11.2 � Checking the differential lock system 6�36
6.11.3 � Front wheel hub bearings (2WD) 6�36
6.11.4 � Checking the braking system with safety brakes valve 6�36
6.12 � Maintenance every 1200 hours or at least once a year 6�38
6.12.1 � Fuel injection pump maintenance 6�38
6.12.2 � Cleaning engine air filter (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50
E �>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
�>D10S653WT1E1001) 6�38
6.12.3 � Cleaning engine air filter (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6�42
6.12.4 � Bleeding air and draining water from the fuel filters (AGROLUX 45 E
�>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E
�>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001) 6�45
6.12.5 � Bleeding the fuel circuit (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6�47
6.12.6 - Starter motor maintenance 6-48
6.13 � Maintenance every 1200 hours or at least every two years 6�49
6.13.1 � Changing the coolant and flushing the circuit (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001,
AGROLUX 50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001,
AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001) 6�49
6.13.2 � Changing the coolant and flushing the circuit (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6�50
6.13.3 � Changing the transmission oil (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX
50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
�>D10S653WT1E1001) 6�51
6.13.4 � Changing the transmission oil (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6�53
6.13.5 � Changing the differential oil, planetary reduction unit oil and side final drives oil (4WD) 6�55
6.13.6 � Checking the steering box oil level (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX
50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
�>D10S653WT1E1001) 6�56
6.14 - General maintenance 6-58
6.14.1 � Bleeding the hydraulic braking system 6�58

7 - FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.1 - Engine troubleshooting 7-2
7.2 � Gearbox troubleshooting 7�4
7.3 � Power take�off troubleshooting 7�5
7.4 � Front�wheel drive troubleshooting 7�6
7.5 � Brakes troubleshooting 7�7
7.6 - Lift troubleshooting 7-8
7.7 � Hydraulic system troubleshooting 7�9
7.8 � Hydraulic remote valves troubleshooting 7�10
7.9 - Electrical system troubleshooting 7-11
7.10 � Fault diagnosis 7�12

VII

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 7 08/02/2013 21.04.44


CONTENTS
8 - WHEELS
8.1 - Introduction 8-2
8.1.1 - General information regarding tyres 8-2
8.2 - Tyre combinations 8-4
8.2.1 - Permissible tyre combinations 8-4
8.3 � Track width calculation 8�7
8.3.1 � Minimum track width 8�7
8.3.2 � Track width adjustment 8�7
8.4 - Ballasting 8-14
8.4.1 - Tractor ballast 8-14
8.4.2 � Front ballast with cast�iron blocks 8�14
8.4.3 � Ballast discs for rear wheels 8�14
8.4.4 � Ballast for wheels with water�filled tyres 8�15

9 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.1 - Battery 9-2
9.1.1 - Battery 9-2
9.2 � Cab fuse box 9�4
9.2.1 � Fuse box (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E
�>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
�>D10S653WT1E1001) 9�4
9.2.2 � Fuse box (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 9�5
9.2.3 - Key to fuse and relay symbols 9-5
9.3 - Lights for road use 9-8
9.3.1 - Lights for road use 9-8
9.3.2 � Headlight alignment 9�10
9.4 � Worklights 9�12
9.4.1 � Worklights 9�12
9.5 - Accessories 9-14
9.5.1 � Installation of additional electronic components and/or equipment 9�14
9.5.2 � Power outlet sockets (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E
�>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
�>D10S653WT1E1001) 9�14
9.5.3 � Power outlet sockets (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 9�15

10 - TECHNICAL DATA
10.1 - Technical data of the tractor 10-2
10.1.1 - Technical data 10-2
10.1.2 � Fuel technical characteristics 10�5
10.1.3 - Biodiesel technical characteristics 10-7
10.1.4 - Coolant 10-9
10.2 � Dimensions and weights 10�11
10.2.1 � Dimensions and weights of the tractor 10�11
10.3 - Implement attachment diagrams 10-14
10.3.1 - Implement coupling holes diagram 10-14

VIII

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 8 08/02/2013 21.04.45


1
2
3
4
5
1 - IDENTIFICATION

6
7
8
9
10

1-1

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 1 08/02/2013 21.04.46


IDENTIFICATION
1.1 - LIST OF MODEL SERIAL NUMBERS
This Operation and Maintenance Manual covers the following models:
1

Table 1 - Technical data


AGROLUX 45 E AGROLUX 50 E AGROLUX 60 E AGROLUX 70 E
->D10S403WX1E5001 ->D10S453WT1E1001 ->D10S553WT1E1001 ->D10S653WT1E1001

VARIANTS
2

Identifying serial number ->1001 ->1001 ->1001 ->1001


SUPPORT 2WD 2WD/4WD 2WD/4WD 2WD/4WD
Platform/ROPS X X X X

AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001


3

VARIANTS
Identifying serial number ->10001
SUPPORT 2WD/4WD
Platform/ROPS X
X - Standard O - Optional
4

The authorised dealer is obliged to provide the necessary Technical Assistance and to offer technical support through his own service
centre and specialised personnel to ensure that the tractor is capable of offering its maximum performance.
Use the space below to record your tractor identification data:
l Tractor model:
l Tractor identification number:
5

l Engine model
l Engine number:
l Date of purchase:
l Dealer’s name:
l Dealer’s telephone number:
6
7
8
9
10

1-2

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 2 08/02/2013 21.04.46


IDENTIFICATION
1.2 - IDENTIFICATION PLATES
1.2.1 - Tractor identification plate

1
The tractor’s serial number is punched on an aluminium plate located on the inner side of the left�hand fender
1. Type of tractor
2. Tractor serial number

2
3
Fig. 1

1.2.2 - Tractor serial number


The tractor’s serial number is punched on the right�hand side of the front axle

4
support.

5
Fig. 2

1.2.3 - Engine number

6
The engine serial number is punched on the right�hand side of the engine block.

7
8
Fig. 3
9
10

1-3

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 3 08/02/2013 21.04.53


IDENTIFICATION
1.2.4 - Engine identification plate
The engine identification plate is fixed to the left side of the crankcase.
1
2

Fig. 4
3

1.2.5 - Roll bar identification plate


The Roll Over Protection Structures (frame with two rear posts or two front posts, four post frame or cab) prescribed by EC Directives
and/or the OECD (Organisation for Economic Co�operation and Development) international codes shall be hereinafter referred to as
the: “Roll bar” or “Cab”.
The roll bar identification plate is fixed to the base of the roll bar.
4

The identification plate contains the following information:


1. Manufacturer 1 2
2. Roll bar type
3. Approval number Made by
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR
CAB or SAFETY FRAME
CABINA o TELAIO DI PROTEZIONE

4. OCDE approval number ITALIA S.p.A.


TREVIGLIO ITALY

5. Tractor model
5

APPROVAZIONE/APPROVAL FOR TRACTORS


PER TRATTORI

O.C.D.E. REPORT

4 3 5

Fig. 5
6
7
8
9
10

1-4

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 4 08/02/2013 21.05.01


IDENTIFICATION
1.3 - ORIGINAL SPARE PARTS
When ordering replacement parts it is essential that the user communicates all the information that identifies the exact tractor model

1
and its serial number, the engine model and the engine serial number. This information is also important to obtain the best possible
technical service.
Use the space below to record your tractor identification data:
l Tractor model
l Tractor serial number

2
l Engine model
l Engine number
l Date of purchase
l Dealer’s name
l Dealer’s telephone number
IMPORTANT:

3
The use of ORIGINAL PARTS will ensure that the perfect operating efficiency of your tractor is maintained and that
running costs are kept to a minimum.

When ordering replacement parts, please supply the following information:


1. Tractor and engine serial number (if the replacement part belongs to the engine).

4
2. Part name and part number.
The use of non�original parts or improper installation of parts will automatically invalidate the tractor’s warranty.
The spare parts catalogue is not included in the use and maintenance manual but is instead managed by the dealer, which offers
service assistance directly
IMPORTANT:

5
To be informed on the serial numbers position (tractor and engine) refer to the “Identification plates” chapter in the
section.

6
7
8
9
10

1-5

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 5 08/02/2013 21.05.05


IDENTIFICATION
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK


6
7
8
9
10

1-6

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 6 08/02/2013 21.05.05


1
2
3
4
5
2 - SAFETY

6
7
8
9
10

2-1

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 1 08/02/2013 21.05.05


SAFETY
2.1 - INTRODUCTION
The symbol shown below, associated with the words Danger, Warning or Caution, used in this manual and on the decals affixed to
1

the tractor, indicates the degree of risk encountered. Failure to observe the Danger, Warning or Caution notices may result in serious
injury or death. These notices are accompanied by appropriate safety instructions, generally contained within a box.
DO NOT ignore these instructions; your safety is at risk!
2
3

Fig. 6

DANGER
Indicates an imminent risk of serious damage, injury or death.
4

WARNING
Indicates an imminent risk of serious damage, injury or death.
5

CAUTION
Indicates a potential risk of minor or moderate damage. The word also serves as a warning against actions that could
lead to a hazardous situation.

Make sure that anyone who uses the tractor has read this manual carefully and has fully understood the procedures for working in
complete safety.
6

Observe all the safety instructions given in this manual and the safety warning notices on the tractor itself.
Use the tractor in a safe and responsible manner.
Each time this symbol appears it signifies: Caution! Be careful! Your safety is at risk.
The instructions on the use of the tractor must be given to each person prior to using the tractor for the first
time and at least once a year thereafter.
7
8
9
10

2-2

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 2 08/02/2013 21.05.12


SAFETY
2.2 - PRACTICAL ADVICE ON SAFE WORKING PROCEDURES
WARNING

1
The tractor must be utilised only by properly trained operators.

WARNING
Read this manual in its entirety before using the tractor; make sure you understand how to operate all the controls and

2
you have viewed the information on safety regulations contained herein.

WARNING
Make sure that all operators have read and understood this Manual. Incorrect use of the tractor could result in serious
injury or even death.

3
All control systems and devices have their operating limits, so make sure that you know the characteristics of the tractor as regards
speed control, braking, steering, stability and loading capacities before putting the tractor to work.
The safety information provided in this manual does not replace national or local safety regulations, which may be supported by by le-
le�
gislative provisions or the terms of insurance agreements. Check, therefore, that your tractor is fitted with the correct equipment, as
prescribed by local laws and regulations.

4
It is not possible to foresee all potentially hazardous situations. The safety precautions and danger warnings in this manual cannot
therefore by themselves guarantee total safety. If you choose to operate and/or maintain the tractor in a manner that departs from
the prescribed methods, it is your responsibility to ensure that by doing so you are not putting the safety of yourself or others at risk.
Make sure that the tractor is not damaged or rendered unsafe by your chosen methods of use/maintenance.
Ensure that all operators are in possession of an appropriate driving licence and meet the minimum age limits in accordance with the

5
requirements of local law.
2.2.1 - Protect the Environment
It is illegal to pollute wells, water courses and the soil. Use depots for the disposal
of wastes especially authorised for the collection of spent oil, thinners, etc. If in
doubt or for more detailed information consult your Dealer or local authorities.

6
7
Fig. 7
8
9
10

2-3

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 3 08/02/2013 21.05.19


SAFETY
2.3 - GENERAL SAFETY RULES
l In addition to the instructions given in this Operation and Maintenance Manual, observe all general safety and accident pre-
1

vention rules.
l Always follow the highway code when driving on public roads.
l Before starting work, familiarise yourself with all the controls and instruments and their respective functions. It may be too late
to do this once you are already working.
l Before starting the engine, check that all the tractor controls are in neutral position.
2

l Start engine ONLY when seated in operator’s seat.


3

Fig. 8
4

l NEVER start the engine by shorting the starter motor connections to avoid
sudden unexpected movement of the tractor.
DANGER
Make sure that the rubber cover is installed on the starter motor
5

relay.
6

Fig. 9

l Before starting work check that the tractor/implement operating area is clear (e.g. check for the presence of persons, children,
etc.). Ensure that you always have a good field of view.
l Never start the engine in an closed space. Ensure the area is adequately
ventilated.
7

l Do not weld or heat any painted parts. Toxic fumes could be given off. Re-
move paint by abrasion first, before heating the part. Always perform these
operations in a suitable well�ventilated area.
8

Fig. 10
9
10

2-4

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 4 08/02/2013 21.05.22


SAFETY
l Before refuelling always switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.
NEVER refuel when the engine is still hot

1
l NEVER refuel in the presence of naked flames or sparks: diesel fuel is
highly inflammable. Clean up any fuel spills immediately. Do not smoke
during refuelling.
l DO NOT fill the fuel tank right to the filler neck; always allow room for ex-
pansion of the fuel.

2
Fig. 11

l Wear close�fitting clothing. Avoid wearing loose�fitting jackets, shirts or ties.


Passengers may only be carried safely if the tractor is equipped with a proper passenger seat and all the relevant require-

3
l

ments of the local highway code are satisfied. If not, the carrying of passengers is PROHIBITED.
WARNING
DO NOT allow anyone to climb on the implement or other equipment, including trailers, except for certain harvesting
machines specifically designed to carry one or more persons during harvesting operations (not for transportation).

4
l Before leaving the operator position, remember to lower the 3�point linkage and/or any implement mounted on the tractor. Put
all controls in neutral, apply the handbrake, switch off the engine, engage first gear (on tractors with mechanical gearbox),
remove the key from the ignition switch and to turn the battery earth switch to “off” (where present).
l When the tractor is in operation, do not allow anyone to approach the drive
shaft, hooks, swinging drawbar, link arms, PTO shafts, lifting cylinders,

5
drive belts, pulleys or any other moving parts. Make sure that all protections
and guards are correctly installed in their respective locations.
DANGER
Perform maintenance work on the cardan shaft and on the power

6
take�off solely with the PTO disengaged, the engine switched off
and the ignition key removed.

Fig. 12

l The tractor may be equipped with a radar for measuring ground speed. The

7
radar emits microwaves at low power, but it is anyway advisable to KEEP
CLEAR of the emission zone when the radar is operating.
8

Fig. 13
9
10

2-5

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 5 08/02/2013 21.05.27


SAFETY
l Keep heat well away from pipes and hoses containing pressurised fluids.
Heating pressurised pipes and hoses can cause inflammable fluids to spray
1

out and cause serious burns to you and others nearby.


2

Fig. 14

l Avoid contact with pesticides. Tractor cabs, when fitted, do NOT protect you against inhaling dangerous pesticides. Meticu-
lously follow the manufacturer’s directions for using and handling pesticides. Always wear the required personal protective
3

equipment (respirator, face mask, etc.) even in the cab.


4
5
6
7
8
9
10

2-6

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 6 08/02/2013 21.05.28


SAFETY
2.4 - ACCIDENT PREVENTION AND PERSONAL SAFETY
WARNING

1
Some of the illustrations in this manual show the tractor with panels or guards and panels removed for the sake of clar-
ity. Do not use the tractor unless these guards and panels are fitted correctly. If it is essential to remove these guards
or panels in order to repair the tractor, they MUST be refitted before starting the tractor.

2.4.1 - Safety clothing and equipment

2
Wear the appropriate protective clothing and safety equipment for the task in hand.
Equip yourself with the following:
l a hard hat
l safety spectacles or face shield visor
l protective gloves (neoprene for chemical products, leather for heavy work)
l ear defenders

3
l respirator or filter mask
l waterproof clothing
l reflective clothing
l safety footwear

4
Fig. 15

For safety reasons, it is also advisable to keep a fire extinguisher and first aid kit
in the tractor.

5
6
Fig. 16

DO NOT wear loose fitting clothing, jewellery, chains or other accessories. ALWAYS tie back long hair, which otherwise could become
entangled in control levers or in other parts of the tractor.
Do not wear headphones to listen to the radio or music while operating the tractor.

7
2.4.2 - Exposure to noise
The tractor and any implements mounted or attached to it constitute a source of noise, the intensity and frequency of which can be
measured using the appropriate instruments.
Anyone who uses the tractor must know that:
exposure to excessive and/or prolonged noise can cause serious damage, not just to the hearing but also to general health.
8
l

The higher the noise level (dbA) and the greater the duration of exposure, the higher the risk. The combination of both these
factors can expressed in the value LEP (level of personal exposure to noise).
l you therefore need to know the noise level generated by the tractor. For further information, refer to the “Technical Data” Sec-
tion in this Operation and Maintenance Manual.
l the use of hearing protection is essential when the noise level exceeds a certain value and/or when operating the tractor for
prolonged periods. The point at which action is to be taken is generally when the level of personal exposure reaches or ex-
9

ceeds 85 db(A). Various types of protection are available, including ear defenders, ear plugs and helmets.
10

2-7

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 7 08/02/2013 21.05.32


SAFETY
2.4.3 - Boarding and alighting from the tractor
Climb up and down from the operator position slowly, facing the tractor, using the handrail and access steps.
1

To avoid falling, always maintain three points of contact at a time (both hands on
the handrails and one foot on the steps or one hand on the handrail and both feet
on the steps).
2
3

Fig. 17

l DO NOT use the control levers for handholds.


l DO NOT climb up using the pedals as footholds.
l DO NOT attempt to board or alight from the tractor when it is moving; wait until it has come to a complete stop.
l NEVER jump down from the tractor, unless in an emergency.
4

Carry out the following operations before alighting from the tractor:
l Apply the parking brake.
l Move all controls to the neutral position, (remember to disengage the PTO).
l Lower the 3�point linkage and any implement attached to the tractor to the ground.
l Stop the engine.
l Engage first gear on tractors with mechanical gearboxes; on tractors with hydraulic gearboxes, always place chocks under
5

the wheels.
l Remove the ignition key.
l Alight from the tractor.

2.4.4 - Parking the tractor


The tractor must be parked differently depending on the terrain and operational status of the engine:
6

l Parking the tractor with the engine off;


l Parking the tractor with the engine running;
l Parking the tractor on steep slopes.
Parking the tractor with the engine off
l Apply the handbrake;
Move all controls to the neutral position;
7

l
l Lower the 3�point linkage and any implement attached to the tractor, to the ground;
l Stop the engine;
l Engage first gear on tractors with mechanical gearboxes.
Parking the tractor with the engine running
l Check that no�one is in the vicinity of the tractor;
8

l Check that the tractor is parked on level ground;


l Apply the handbrake;
l Move all drive controls to the neutral position.
Parking the tractor on steep slopes
To park the tractor on slopes, proceed as indicated previously depending on the situation.
9

If it is necessary to park the tractor on a steep slope, even for a short time, position chocks under the rear wheels to prevent it from
moving. It is in any case preferable not to park the tractor on sloping terrain.
The chocks should normally be positioned under the rear wheels by a second person, who must stand to the side of the tractor at
all times.
If no assistant is available for this purpose, before alighting from the tractor the operator must fully engage the parking brake, check
10

that tractor is not moving, and then carefully position the chocks under the wheels while standing to the side of the tractor.

2-8

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 8 08/02/2013 21.05.34


SAFETY
2.4.5 - Cleaning the tractor
l Keep the area under the hood and the operator position clean.

1
l Clean the access steps, the pedals and the floor of the operator position. Clean up any oil and grease. Brush away dust and
mud. During winter months, remove snow and ice.
l Remove all tools, buckets, chains and hooks.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

2-9

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 9 08/02/2013 21.05.34


SAFETY
2.5 - OPERATION
l DO NOT use the tractor while under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
1

l The tractor speed must ALWAYS be adapted to suit the ground conditions. Avoid sharp turns when travelling up, down or
across slopes. Do not drive at high speed or corner with the differential lock engaged. When driving on slopes, never depress
the clutch or change gear.
l Only attach trailers and/or implements in the specified manner. The operation, steering and braking characteristics of the
tractor are different when coupled to implements and trailers and when ballast is fitted. Check that the steering and braking
characteristics are adequate.
2

l Before starting the engine, check that all the tractor controls are in neutral position. This is to prevent accidental movement of
the vehicle or starting of PTO�driven implements.
l Start engine ONLY when seated in operator’s seat.
l ONLY operate the controls when seated in the operator’s seat.
l Move over to the side of the road to allow faster vehicles to overtake. Before turning, use the direction indicator and slow down.
Ensure that all the lights on the tractor are kept clean.
3

l Make sure that the weight of a towed trailer without brakes does NOT EXCEED that of the tractor. The distance required for
the tractor to come to a stop increases with its speed as the inertia of the towed load increases, particularly on slopes.
l Only use the 3�point linkage to hitch implements designed for the purpose; do not use it as a towing hitch. For towing use the
rear towing hitch (the front hook is for use in emergencies only). The rear towing hitch must NEVER be set to a position that
is higher than the rear axle.
l The travel speed must be such as to allow complete control and stability of the tractor at all times. Where possible avoid oper-
4

ating tractor near ditches, embankments and holes. Reduce speed when turning on slopes and on rough, slippery or muddy
ground.
l For safety reasons, it is good practice to engage a suitably low gear before tackling an incline.
l DO NOT use ether based products to help start the engine when cold. Follow the instructions given in the “Cold starting”
heading.
5

2.5.1 - Checking indicator lights


After starting, check all the indicator lights and instruments. Check that everything is functioning correctly.
If the tractor does not respond correctly to any of the controls, DO NOT use it until the fault has been rectified.
2.5.2 - Starting fluids
In cold climates, the tractor may be equipped with a thermostarter; for operating instructions, see the paragraph “Starting”.
6

DANGER
DO NOT use aerosol spray starting aids to start the tractor when the thermostarter is connected to the electrical sys-
tem. If ether comes into contact with the thermostarter it can cause an explosion and thus damage the engine and/or
cause serious injury.

2.5.3 - Auxiliary equipment


7

l Implements and trailers must only be attached to the tractor using the appropriate hitches or drawbars. Implements or trailers
may only be towed from the rear towing hitch (the front hitch is only to be used in emergencies). The height of the rear tow-
ing hitch should never be positioned at a height that exceeds that of the rear axle. Only use the 3�point linkage with suitable
implements; do not use it as a tow bar.
8

WARNING
Do not stand or allow anyone else to stand between the tractor and the implement, unless the engine is shut off and
the key removed from the starter switch, the parking brake applied, a gear engaged and all attachments or implements
lowered to the ground.
l For applications using PTO�driven implements with the tractor stationary, always put the gearbox in neutral, apply the parking
9

brake and chock the wheels of the tractor and the implement itself. For further information on safe working procedures, refer
to the chapter “Parking the tractor”.
l DO NOT use PTO drive shaft extensions or adapters that extend the drive shaft or universal joints beyond the protection of
the PTO shield.
l Only use attachments and implements approved by the tractor manufacturer.
10

2-10

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 10 08/02/2013 21.05.44


SAFETY
DANGER
DO NOT attempt to uncouple hydraulic connections or adjust implements with the engine running and the PTO rotat-

1
ing. To do so could result in very serious injury or death.

l Check that the 3�point linkage is adjusted correctly (see “Adjustment of the 3�point linkage”. in the Section “Use of the Tractor”)
in order to ensure that a sufficient number of threads are engaged on the threaded couplings.
l Meticulously follow the producer’s instructions when storing and handling chemicals. Also follow the instructions of the manu-
facturers of the equipment designed for the application of chemical products.

2
l Before using attachments or implements, read the relative Instruction Manual carefully and follow all the safety instructions.
WARNING
A front loader (with fork or bucket) must be fitted with a load restraining device (round bales, rolls of fencing, wire, etc,)
to prevent the load, when raised, from rolling down from the lift arms onto the driving position and crushing the driver.
Inadequately secured objects and loads may fall and injure persons in the vicinity of the tractor.

3
l DO NOT overload an attachment or trailed implement. Use the proper ballast weights to maintain the stability of the tractor.
l Use the safety chain when transporting implements to prevent them becoming detached from the drawbar. Using the appropri-
ate adapters, attach the chain to the towing hitch support or to another anchor point on the tractor. The chain should have only
enough slack to allow cornering. Use chains of suitable size and strength for the weight of the trailed implement.
l Make sure that each trailerable implement is equipped with a safety chain to connect it to the tractor.

4
2.5.4 - Towing safely
For the maximum towable loads, refer to the paragraph “Maximum towable loads in the Technical Data Section.
l Maintain a suitable speed taking into account the weight of the trailed load and the gradient, remembering that braking dis-
tances will be greater than with just the tractor. Trailed loads with or without brakes that are too heavy for the tractor or that
towed at too high speed may cause the operator to loose of control of the tractor.

5
l Always take into consideration the total weight of the implements and their loads.
WARNING
When a trailer is hitched to the tractor, before you leave the driving seat remember to put all the controls in neutral, ap-
ply the handbrake, switch off the engine, engage first gear (if the tractor has a mechanical transmission) and remove
the key from the starter switch. If the tractor is not parked on level ground, ALWAYS place chocks under the wheels of

6
both the tractor and the trailer. For further information on safe working procedures, refer to the chapter “Working with
stationary implements” in the safety section of this manual.
l When trailers are hitched to the tractor, before you leave the operator seat remember to put all the controls in neutral, apply
the handbrake, switch off the engine, engage first gear (with mechanical transmissions) and remove the ignition key. ALWAYS
chock both the tractor and the trailer wheels. The best way to transport a tractor that has broken down is to transport it on a

7
low loader. Always secure the tractor to the loader bed with chains. Before transporting the tractor on a low loader or on a
railway wagon, make sure that the engine hood, doors, openable roof (if present) and windows are all closed and securely
fastened. Never tow the tractor at speeds in excess of 10 kph. An operator must stay in the operator position to steer and
brake the tractor.

2.5.5 - Driving on the road


8

DANGER
When driving downhill never exceed the speed limit for the road and your vehicle and do not allow the engine speed
to exceed the maximum permissible rpm.

l Comply with the highway code, including regulations concerning speed limits, correct use of lights, hazard warning lights and
9

slow moving vehicle warning signs.


l When driving the tractor on the road, insert the connecting latch to lock the two brake pedals together. This is to ensure effec-
tive, even braking on both sides.
l Make sure that there is plenty of headroom before passing under power lines, bridges, etc.
l Raise all implements to their lowest transport position and lock them in this position.
l Disengage the power take�off and the differential lock.
10

l Use the correct pin for the towing hitch and secure with its locking cotter.
l Make sure that all necessary outline markings and the hazard warning lights (if required by local regulations) are in place and
in working order.

2-11

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 11 08/02/2013 21.05.57


SAFETY
l Clean all lights required for road use, front and rear, and make sure they are in working order.
l The SMV (Slow Moving Vehicle) sign, the rotating beacon, flashing lights or other high�visibility equipment must be used in
1

compliance with the statutory rules of the highway code.


l Fix the swinging towing hitch in a fixed position using the safety locks. If required by the rules of the highway code, affix the
appropriate safety warnings to the load.
l DO NOT use work lights during transfer on public roads.
l Make sure that the load does not obscure the hazard warning lights or other lights.
l The SMV notice must be visibly displayed on the rear of the tractor.
l Take extra care when driving on snow covered or icy roads.
2

2.5.6 - Overturning
WARNING
DO NOT disengage the clutch or change gear after starting to drive down a slope.
3

WARNING
Never tow semi�mounted implements, trailers or agricultural machines by attaching them to the top link of the three�
point linkage. This could cause the tractor to rear up or overturn backwards.

The tractor is equipped with a homologated protective structure (ROPS: Roll Over Protective Structure) in compliance with the
the inter�
inter-
4

national OECD (“Organisation for Economic Co�operation and Development”) standards, in order to reduce the risk of operator injury
if the tractor should overturn.
In the event of overturning, grip the steering wheel firmly and do not attempt to
abandon the vehicle until it is completely stationary. If the cab doors do not open,
leave the operator position through the safety hatch identified by the relative de-
5

cals.
6

Fig. 18

The following precautions should be taken to prevent the possibility of overturning:


l Adjust the track width to suit the task in hand.
7

l If the tractor is equipped with a front loader, keep the bucket and load as low as possible.
l A tractor with a front loader with loaded bucket should travel in reverse down a downhill slope and forwards on an uphill slope.
l On rough terrain, moderate the speed to avoid losing control of the steering.
l To avoid roll over, always drive the tractor carefully and at a safe speed, especially on loose ground, when crossing ditches or
slopes or turning tight corners.
l DO NOT attempt to make tight turns at high speed.
Use extreme caution when working with the tractor on steep inclines.
8

l Always drive straight up or down slopes, as traversing slopes across the


gradient could cause the tractor to overturn.
9
10

Fig. 19

2-12

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 12 08/02/2013 21.06.07


SAFETY
l When travelling up or down hill (on an incline) keep implements as close to the ground as possible.
l An unloaded tractor or a tractor with a rear�mounted implement should tackle uphill gradients slopes in reverse and downhill

1
gradients travelling forwards.
l DO NOT freewheel down a slope with the clutch disengaged or the gearbox in neutral.
l When carrying out tasks requiring high tractive force, engage 4WD, if available.
l Only loads suited to the tractor power output may be towed, see the Technical Data Section.
l When towing a load at transport speed or in the field, lock the drawbar in the central position and use the safety chain.
l NEVER tow by hitching to the top link of the 3�point linkage or from any point higher than the centre of the rear wheels.
l Always use the towing hitches approved by the manufacturer and the corresponding lock pins.

2
l Use front ballast weights to increase the stability of the tractor when towing heavy loads or to counterbalance a heavy rear�
mounted implement.
l If the tractor is hitched to a heavy load or a fixed object, improper use of the clutch can cause the tractor to overturn.
l If the front of the tractor starts to rise up, reduce speed and, if necessary, disengage the clutch immediately.
l Reduce your speed when working on loose or slippery ground and when unseen hazards could be hidden by branches or
leaves.

3
l DO NOT use the tractor to herd animals.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

2-13

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 13 08/02/2013 21.06.08


SAFETY
2.6 - PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE AND SEAT BELT
2.6.1 - Roll-over protective structure (R.O.P.S.)
1

The tractor is equipped with a homologated protective structure (ROPS: Roll Over Protective Structure) in compliance with the
the inter�
inter-
national OECD (“Organisation for Economic Co�operation and Development”) standards, in order to reduce the risk of operator injury
if the tractor should overturn.
The ROPS must always be kept in a vertical position, locked, and the operator
must keep the seat belt fastened.
2
3

Fig. 20

Use the ROPS in its folded position only when strictly necessary to park the tractor in buildings with low headroom; for this operation
4

DO NOT fasten the seat belt and drive the tractor with the maximum caution.
Before resuming any activity reposition the ROPS in its vertical position and ensure it is locked in place.
Damaged ROPS
DANGER
Functionality of the ROPS is impaired if it is structurally damaged (as would occur, for example, further to overturning
5

of the tractor or other accidents) or shows signs of alterations of any type caused by wear, deformations or impact
damage; in this case, immediately suspend use of the tractor and contact your dealer to fit a replacement ROPS.
Failure to renew the ROPS following accidents or overturning may result in death or serious injury of the operator.
DANGER
DO NOT ALTER THE ROPS (e.g.: welding, drilling, bending, grinding, etc.). The functionality of the ROPS in such
6

cases would be impaired.

The ROPS DOES NOT protect the operator from falling objects or penetration by objects.
The tractor equipped with ROPS does not provide any protection when using hazardous substances.
2.6.2 - Seat belt
7

ALWAYS fasten the seat belt when the tractor is equipped with:
l cab
l ROPS in vertical position and locked
DANGER
8

Functionality of the seat belt is impaired if it is structurally damaged (as would occur, for example, further to over-
turning of the tractor or other accidents) or shows signs of alterations of any type caused by wear, deformations or
impacts; in this case, immediately suspend use of the tractor and contact your dealer to fit a replacement seat belt.
9
10

2-14

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 14 08/02/2013 21.06.17


SAFETY
2.7 - REPAIRS AND MAINTENANCE IN SAFETY
l Perform maintenance operations only with the tractor at a standstill and

1
with the engine stopped and cold.

2
Fig. 21

3
l Before carrying out repairs or adjustments consult your Dealer and, if necessary, arrange to have the work carried out by
specialised technicians.
l The implement and /or the tractor must be supported on suitable wooden blocks or stands. DO NOT use hydraulic jacks.
l Before carrying out adjustments and/or maintenance of the electrical system, disconnect the lead from the negative (�) battery
terminal.

4
l Incorrect connection of the battery terminals or incorrect connection of the
battery to a battery charger could damage the electrical system or even
cause the battery to explode. NEVER connect the battery terminals togeth-
er. The acid electrolyte contained in the battery is highly corrosive and can
cause burns or even blindness if it enters the eyes. In an enclosed space
it is toxic. Never smoke or allow a naked flame in the vicinity when filling or

5
topping up the battery with electrolyte. Always wear safety goggles when
carrying out operations on the battery.

Fig. 22

6
l Regularly check the brakes; keep the brake fluid reservoir topped up. Make sure that the brakes are always correctly adjusted,
especially when towing trailers.
l NEVER use your hands to trace an oil or fuel leak. Use instead a piece of
wood or cardboard for this purpose. Always discharge the pressure before
disconnecting any part of a pressurised circuit. If engine oil, hydraulic fluid

7
or any fluid from a pressurised circuit penetrates your skin, seek medical
assistance IMMEDIATELY.
8

Fig. 23

l Before carrying out any welding or repair work on a wheel or rim, ALWAYS remove the tyre first. In all cases, if you do not have
the necessary equipment or experience to do the job in complete safety, contact your Dealer.
9

l Periodically check the tightness of all the nuts and bolts, especially the wheel and rim nuts. Tighten to the specified torques
(for torque values, refer to the Maintenance Section).
10

2-15

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 15 08/02/2013 21.06.17


SAFETY
2.8 - EMERGENCY STOP
In the event of operating faults and/or the appearance of warning signals indicating possible hazardous situations or trac-
1

tor malfunction, proceed as follows:


1. Park the tractor in stable and safe conditions in such a way that road traffic is not obstructed
2. Stop the moving tractor by means of the braking devices
3. Switch off the engine by means of the ignition key
4. Remove the key from the ignition switch
2

WARNING
If it is necessary to dismount from the tractor, follow the procedure described in the heading “Dismounting from the
tractor safely”.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

2-16

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 16 08/02/2013 21.06.20


SAFETY
2.9 - SAFETY WARNING NOTICES
2.9.1 - Adhesive safety warning decals

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Fig. 24 - Positions of safety decals on the tractor


WARNING
ALWAYS keep safety labels clean and legible. Replace any missing, damaged or paint�obliterated labels. Replace-
ment labels can be ordered from your Dealer. The locations of safety labels and the parts codes for ordering them are
10

specified in this chapter. When replacing a part that carries a safety label, make sure that a label of the same type is
applied to the new part. Do not use fuel or solvents etc. to clean safety labels. Use a clean cloth dampened in soapy
water.

2-17

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 17 08/02/2013 21.06.28


SAFETY
Position of safety decals
1. Position: on starter motor solenoid.
1

CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE


2.9939.295.0 - Do not board the tractor when it is moving. Use cau-
tion when working on the electrical system Discon-
nect the negative lead from the battery before remov-
ing the cover over the solenoid valves and working on
the electrical system.
2

Read the instructions in the user and maintenance


manual

Fig. 25
2. Position: on right fender.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
3

2.9939.296.0 - Always fasten the seat belt when the tractor is


equipped with a:
- cab
� protective structure in the vertical position and cor-
rectly locked.
Read the instructions in the user and maintenance
4

manual

Fig. 26
Position: on instrument panel near the oil filler.
5

3.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.297.0 - Before topping up the brake oil, refer to the user and
maintenance manual
6

Fig. 27
4. Position: on right fender.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.272.0 - Read and comply with the operating instructions and
safety precautions prior to operation.
7
8

Fig. 28
9
10

2-18

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 18 08/02/2013 21.06.29


SAFETY
5. Position: above the PTO guards.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
Take great care when using the PTO.

1
2.9939.274.0 -
Read the instructions in the user and maintenance
manual

2
3
Fig. 29
6. Position: right pillar.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.276.0 IMPORTANT The Protective structure reduces the risks of injury to
the operator in the case of overturning of the vehicle;
it must always be kept in a vertical position and

4
locked, and the seat belt must be kept fastened.

5
6
Fig. 30
7. Position: on the engine cooling circuit expansion tank.

7
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.280.0 DANGER Do not remove the cap of the expansion tank cap
when the engine is hot because the circuit is pres-
surised and can injure the operator.
Read the instructions in the Operation and Mainte-
nance Manual.
8
9

Fig. 31
10

2-19

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 19 08/02/2013 21.06.31


SAFETY
8. Position: on right and left side of the engine radiator.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
Keep hands clear of fan and belts while engine is
1

2.9939.273.0 DANGER
running.
2
3

Fig. 32
9. Position: right pillar.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.451.0 - Use the Protective structure in its folded position only
when strictly necessary to park the tractor in buildings
4

with low headroom; for this operation DO NOT fasten


the seat belt and drive the tractor with the maximum
caution. Before using the tractor check to ensure that
the Protective structure is in the vertical position and
locked.
5

Fig. 33
6

10. Position: On right and left sides of the engine radiator, the right and left side panels, rear remote valves.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.449.0 DANGER Danger. Very hot parts! Burns hazard!
7
8

Fig. 34
11. Position: on the front grille of the hood.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
General hazard warning! Shearing hazard! Keep
9

2.9939.465.0 -
clear of moving parts! Some parts of the machine can
reach very high temperatures, with a consequent risk
of burns!
10

Fig. 35

2-20

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 20 08/02/2013 21.06.34


SAFETY
12. Position: engine cooling system radiator.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE

1
2.9939.329.0 CAUTION Consult the Operation and Maintenance manual to
identify the type of liquid to be used in the cooling
system.

2
3
Fig. 36
13. Position: on the right and left rear fenders.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.271.0 IMPORTANT When using the external controls stand at the side of

4
the tractor.

Fig. 37

5
6
7
8
9
10

2-21

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 21 08/02/2013 21.06.35


SAFETY
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK


6
7
8
9
10

2-22

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 22 08/02/2013 21.06.35


1
2
3
4
3 - GETTING TO KNOW YOUR

5
TRACTOR

6
7
8
9
10

3-1

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 1 08/02/2013 21.06.36


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.1 - EXTERIOR VIEWS OF THE TRACTOR
3.1.1 - External views of the tractor
1
2
3
4
5

Fig. 38 - Front view of tractor in the 4WD version


6
7
8
9

Fig. 39 - Rear view of tractor in the 4WD version


10

3-2

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 2 08/02/2013 21.06.42


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR

1
2
3
4
Fig. 40 - Front view of tractor in the 2WD version

5
6
7
8

Fig. 41 - Front view of tractor in the 2WD version


9
10

3-3

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 3 08/02/2013 21.06.50


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.2 - ACCESS TO THE DRIVING POSITION
3.2.1 - Access to the driving position
1

Steps to driver’s seat


Access to the driving position is provided by steps (1) with a wide, non�slip tread.
2
3

Fig. 42
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

3-4

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 4 08/02/2013 21.06.52


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.3 - OPERATOR SEAT
3.3.1 - Operator seats

1
The following operator seats may be installed on this tractor:
1. CMVR fixed seat with mechanical suspension and PVC upholstery.
2. Adjustable “CMVR” seat with mechanical suspension and PVC upholstery.
3. “KAB XH2” seat with mechanical suspension and PVC upholstery.
4. GRAMMER MSG 83/721 seat with mechanical suspension and PVC upholstery.

2
3.3.2 - CMVR seat
This seat is available in two different configurations:
l Fixed type
l Adjustable type
CMVR fixed seat

3
DANGER
Never adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion.

The driver’s seat is made from PVC and is weather resistant. It is mounted directly to the tractor and features spring suspension

4
adjustment by way of knob (1).
CMVR fixed driver’s seat
1. Seat suspension adjuster knob

5
6
Fig. 43

CMVR adjustable seat


DANGER
Never adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion.

The driver’s seat is made from PVC and is weather resistant. It is mounted directly to the tractor and features backward/forward
adjustment by way of lever (1) spring suspension adjustment by way of knob (2).
7
CMVR adjustable driver’s seat
8

1. Lever for backward/forward seat adjustment


2. Seat suspension adjuster knob
9

Fig. 44
10

3-5

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 5 08/02/2013 21.06.57


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.3.3 - “KAB XH2” seat
The driver’s seat is made from PVC and is weather resistant.
1

DANGER
Never adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion.
2
3
4
5

Fig. 45 - Side and front views of seat KAB XH2


6

1. Seat spring firmness adjustment lever


2. Spring firmness plate
3. Lever for backward/forward seat adjustment
4. Seat height adjustment knob
1 � Seat spring firmness adjustment lever
Operate the lever as shown in the figure to adjust the seat spring firmness. Before
7

moving the lever, check the indication on the knob; if the positive sign is visible,
spring firmness will increase, while if the negative sign is shown, spring firmness
will be reduced. The knob can be rotated by first disengaging the catch. The point-
er on the gauge indicates the degree of firmness.
8

Fig. 46
9
10

3-6

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 6 08/02/2013 21.07.01


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3 � Lever for longitudinal seat adjustment
Pull the lever and the seat can be slid forwards or backwards to suit the stature

1
and preferred driving position of the operator.

2
Fig. 47

4 � Seat height adjustment knob


The seat can be raised or lowered by way of the adjustment knob. Adjust the

3
height to suit the build and personal preference of the operator. Pull the knob out
from the notches, and move it to the right to decrease the height of the seat or to
the left to increase the height.

4
Fig. 48

3.3.4 - GRAMMER MSG83/721” seat with mechanical suspension and PVC upholstery

5
DANGER
Never adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion.

The ample operator’s seat is anatomically contoured and upholstered in non�slip material.

6
The seat can be adjusted to the desired weight, forward/backward positioning and backrest angle; it can therefore be perfectly adju-
adju�
sted to suit the weight and stature of the operator.

7
8
9
10

3-7

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 7 08/02/2013 21.07.07


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
1
2
3
4

Fig. 49 - View of “GRAMMER MSG83/721” seat


1. Lever for backward/forward seat adjustment
Seat spring firmness adjustment lever
5

2.
3. Height adjustment knob
4. Seat firmness adjustment indicator
Seat adjustments
1. Backward/forward seat adjustment
Pull the lever (1) upwards to move the seat forwards or backwards to suit
6

the stature and personal preference of the driver.


7

Fig. 50
2. Seat spring firmness adjustment
8

Move lever (2) alternatively clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or


decrease the firmness according to the weight of the driver. The indicator
(5) shows the seat firmness adjustment level.
9

Fig. 51
10

3-8

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 8 08/02/2013 21.07.12


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3. height adjustment
Turn the knob (3) to positions from 0 to 3 to raise and lower the seat. The

1
selected position is shown by a yellow indicator alongside the knob.

2
Fig. 52

3.3.5 - Passenger seats

3
WARNING
Your tractor is designed to carry just one person. In some countries it is permitted to fit a passenger seat supplied by
the manufacturer. Check first whether the tractor is homologated to carry a passenger.

DANGER

4
The carrying of passengers is not permitted unless the tractor is equipped with a suitable seat. When using the pas-
senger seat, observe local regulations, including those of the insurance company regarding injury at work.

5
6
7
Fig. 53 - Passenger seats
Passenger seats are located on both fenders.
If the passenger seats are used, make sure to comply with all applicable local laws so as not to invalidate your accident insurance.
3.3.6 - Seat belt
8

WARNING
Always fasten the seat belt when the tractor is equipped with a cab or ROPS locked in the vertical poisition.

The tractor is fitted with an adjustable seat belt. Carry out the following adjustments before starting the engine.
9
10

3-9

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 9 08/02/2013 21.07.31


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Fasten and unfasten the seat belt
l To fasten the seat belt, insert blade (1) into slot (2).
1

l To release the seat belt, press button (3).


2

Fig. 54

The length of the seat belt can be adjusted as follows:


3

l pull the end (4) to shorten the belt


4

Fig. 55

pull the end (5) to lengthen the belt


5

l
6

Fig. 56
7
8
9
10

3-10

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 10 08/02/2013 21.07.31


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.4 - REAR-VIEW MIRRORS
3.4.1 - External rear-view mirrors

1
For maximum control when performing difficult manoeuvres it is vital that the rear�view mirrors are correctly adjusted.
Adjust both rear�view mirrors.
Position the mirror to obtain a clear view of the side of the tractor and the imple-
ment from the operator’s seat.

2
3
Fig. 57

Tilt the mirror manually to obtain the best view from the operator’s seat.
The mirror arms rotate about their pivots and can be turned inwards towards the

4
tractor to reduce the overall width of the vehicle.
As they rotate, the mirror arms pass through preset intermediate positions.

5
Fig. 58

Rearview mirrors for tractors with roll bar

6
Tractors equipped with rollbar have the mirror mounted on the rollbar pillar.
To adjust, proceed as follows:
Vertical adjustment
Tilt the mirror manually to obtain the best view from the operator’s seat.

7
8

Fig. 59
9
10

3-11

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 11 08/02/2013 21.07.31


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
The mirror arms rotate about their pivots and can be turned inwards towards the
tractor to reduce the overall width of the vehicle.
1

As they rotate, the mirror arms pass through preset intermediate positions.
2

Fig. 60
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

3-12

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 12 08/02/2013 21.07.31


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.5 - INSTRUMENTS AND TRACTOR CONTROLS
3.5.1 - Instruments and tractor controls

1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 61 - Overview for tractors with 8FWD + 2REV transmission (standard for 40hp optional for 50hp)
1. Instrument panel
2. Worklights switch

6
3. Direction indicators switch
4. Hand throttle
5. Horn
6. Hazard lights switch
7. Brake pedal
8. Starter switch

7
9. Brake fluid reservoir filler
10. Clutch pedal
11. Main gear lever (4FWD+REV)
12. Hare (fast) � Tortoise (slow) selector lever
13. Accelerator pedal
14. Lights switch
15. Hydraulic lift control console
8

16. Parking brake lever


17. Access steps
18. PTO clutch control lever
19. 540/750 rpm PTO selector
20. 4WD engagement lever
21. Engine STOP switch
9
10

3-13

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 13 08/02/2013 21.07.32


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
1
2
3
4
5

Fig. 62 - Overview for tractors with 12FWD + 3REV transmission (for 50-60-70 hp)
1. Instrument panel
2. Worklights switch
3. Direction indicators switch
4. Hand throttle
5. Horn
6

6. Hazard lights switch


7. Brake pedal
8. Starter switch
9. Brake fluid reservoir filler
10. Clutch pedal
11. Main gear lever (4FWD+REV)
Range gear lever (Low�High�Creep)
7

12.
13. Accelerator pedal
14. Lights switch
15. Hydraulic lift control console
16. Parking brake lever
17. Access steps
18. PTO clutch control lever
8

19. 540/750 rpm PTO selector


20. 4WD engagement lever
21. Engine stop
9
10

3-14

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 14 08/02/2013 21.07.32


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.5.2 - Instrument panel

1
2
3
4
Fig. 63 - View of instrument panel

5
1. Rev counter
2. Total hour counter
3. PTO speed indicator
4. Fuel gauge
5. Coolant temperature gauge
6. Indicator lights

6
7. Speedometer
8. Rev counter
Multimeter
Positioned at the centre of the dashboard, displaying the following information:
l Engine operating hour counter

7
l Tractor speed and rear PTO shaft rotation speed
l Engine rpm

Fig. 64
9
10

3-15

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 15 08/02/2013 21.07.40


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Total hour counter
The counter indicates the number of engine operating hours.
1
2

Fig. 65
3

Indicator of engine rpm and rear PTO speed


Indicates the engine speed. This gauge also shows the speed of the rear PTO
(540 rpm). On selecting the rear P.T.O. a warning light will come on at the bottom
of the dashboard indicating operation of the rear PTO.
4
5

Fig. 66

Tractor speed indicator


This gauge indicates the tractor ground speed (the displayed speed corresponds
to the highest speed gear). The value is expressed in “Km/h” or “mph”, depending
6

on the factory settings adopted according to the destination market.


7

Fig. 67

Fuel gauge
8

This gauge indicates the level of fuel in the fuel tank.


When the needle enters the red section of the scale this indicates “LOW FUEL”.
9
10

Fig. 68

3-16

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 16 08/02/2013 21.07.45


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Table 2 - Technical data
AGROLUX 45 E AGROLUX 50 E AGROLUX 60 E AGROLUX 70 E

1
->D10S403WX1E5001 ->D10S453WT1E1001 ->D10S553WT1E1001 ->D10S653WT1E1001

13 - FUEL TANK
Tank capacity litres 65 65 65 65

2
AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001

13 - FUEL TANK
Tank capacity litres 65

CAUTION

3
Never continue to run the engine until the fuel tank is completely empty. If the engine stops because the tractor runs
of fuel, it will then be necessary to bleed the air from the fuel injection system.

Coolant temperature gauge


The dial indicates the temperature of the engine coolant.

4
The coloured zones indicate the different coolant temperature ranges:
l green zone = 40°C � 115 °C
l orange zone = 115 °C � 120°C
l red zone = 120 °C � 130°C

5
When the needle enters the red zone the warning light will illuminate.

Fig. 69

6
WARNING
If the needle moves into the red section, switch off the engine immediately.

Indicator lights

7
IMPORTANT:
Some of the indicator lights described below may not be enabled on your tractor.

IMPORTANT:
8
On starting the engine, the oil filter clogging warning light may stay on for a few minutes. Wait until it goes out before
moving off.

WARNING
If the low engine oil pressure warning light stays on after the engine has started, switch off the engine.
9

WARNING
If the hydraulic services oil filter clogging warning light and the alarm warning light illuminate simultaneously, switch
off the engine immediately.
10

3-17

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 17 08/02/2013 21.07.51


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
1
2

Fig. 70

1. Left direction indicator light - GREEN


3

ON � Flashes during operation of left direction indicator


2. OFF
3. Battery charging warning light � RED
ON �Key in pos. 1 � OFF � After starting the engine. ON WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING: check that the alternator drive belt is
not broken; otherwise contact a Service Centre.
4. Hydraulic oil filter warning light � RED
ON � Change the oil filter.
4

5. Engine oil pressure warning light � RED


ON �Key in pos. 1 � OFF � After starting the engine. ON WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING: switch the engine off immediately and
contact your authorised service centre.
6. PTO operation indicator light - ORANGE
ON - indicates that the PTO output shaft is turning.
7. Parking brake warning light � RED
5

ON � Indicates the parking brake is applied.


8. Air cleaner clogged warning light � RED
ON � Air cleaner clogged: clean.
9. Alarm warning light � RED
ON WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING: switch the engine off immediately.
10. Rear PTO clutch engaged indicator light - RED
6

ON � Indicates PTO clutch disengaged. When the PTO clutch is engaged, the output shaft may start rotating.
11. Main beam indicator light - BLUE
ON - Indicates use of the headlights high beam.
12. Lights on indicator light - GREEN
ON - Indicates use of the sidelights and headlights dipped beam.
13. Direction indicators and hazard flasher light � 1st trailer � GREEN
Flashes during operation of direction indicators or hazard warning lights.
7

14. Trailer braking system low pressure warning light � RED


ON � Indicates insufficient pressure in the trailer braking system.
15. Differential lock engaged � ORANGE
ON � Indicates engagement of the differential locks.
16. Front�wheel drive warning light � ORANGE
ON � Indicates operation of the front�wheel drive.
Hazard warning lights indicator light � GREEN
8

17.
Flashes during operation of the hazard warning lights.
18. Tractor right direction indicator light - GREEN
Flashes during operation of right direction indicator.
9
10

3-18

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 18 08/02/2013 21.07.55


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.5.3 - Console switches
1. Starter switch

1
2. Hazard warning lights switch
3. Direction indicators switch
4. Headlights switch
5. Worklights switch
6. Horn button
7. Engine stop

2
Fig. 71

3
Starter switch
l The starter switch is a key�operated device for starting and switching off
the engine.

4
5
Fig. 72

It has three positions:


l Electrical circuit OFF: � (position 0) To switch off the engine, turn the key in the starter switch to position (0). The key can then
be removed from this position.
Electrical circuit ON: � (ON position). The battery charging and engine oil pressure warning lights on the instrument panel light

6
l

up.
l Engine starting: � (START Position) Turns over the starter motor. When the engine starts, release the key, which will return to
the ON position
WARNING
Before starting the engine, make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated. DO NOT run the engine in an enclosed area.

7
Exhaust gases can cause asphyxia.

Hazard warning lights switch


The hazard warning lights are activated by pressing this switch. This causes all
the direction indicators to flash simultaneously. The switch (1) is equipped with
8

an indicator light that illuminates when the hazard lights are active. This switch is
enabled even when the engine is off and the key is removed.
9

Fig. 73
10

3-19

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 19 08/02/2013 21.07.58


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Headlights switch
This four position switch (1) controls the headlights used for driving on
1

public roads:
l Position 0 - Lights off
l Position 1 � Sidelights on, instrument panel lighting on and number plate
light on. The green light on the instrument illuminates to indicate that the
lights are switched on.
Position 2 � Low beam headlights on, instrument panel lighting on and num-
2

ber plate light on. The green light on the instrument illuminates to indicate
that the lights are switched on.
l Position 3 � High beam headlights on, instrument panel lighting on and
number plate light on. The green light on the instrument illuminates to indi-
Fig. 74
cate that the lights are switched on.
Position 4 � High beam headlights on, sidelights off, instrument panel light-
3

ing on and number plate light on.

Worklights switch
Press the top part of the switch (1) to turn on the front worklights, press the bottom
of the switch (1) to turn them off. When the worklights are on, the symbol on the
4

switch (1) will illuminate with an amber light.


5

Fig. 75

Horn button
6

l Press the button (1) to sound the horn


7

Fig. 76
8

Direction indicator switch


l Turn the switch (1) in the required direction to activate the direction indica-
tors.
9
10

Fig. 77

3-20

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 20 08/02/2013 21.07.58


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.5.4 - Right-hand console
The controls on the right�hand console are easily�identifiable and arranged so that the most important ones are nearest the driver.

1
2
3
4
Fig. 78 - View of the controls to the right of the driver - version with 12FWD-3REV transmission

5
1. Main gear and reverse lever
2. Range gear lever
3. Lift position control lever
4. Lift draft control lever

6
7
8
9

Fig. 79 - View of the controls to the right of the driver - version with 8FWD-2REV transmission
10

1. Main gear and reverse lever


2. Range gear lever
3. Lift position control lever

3-21

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 21 08/02/2013 21.07.59


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
1
2
3
4

Fig. 79 - View of the controls to the right of the driver - version with 8FWD-2REV transmission
4. Lift draft control lever
5

3.5.5 - Protective structure and seat belt


WARNING
The protective structure reduces the risks of injury to the operator in the case of overturning of the vehicle; it must
always be kept in a vertical position and locked, and the seat belt must be kept fastened.
6

WARNING
Use the ROPS in its folded position only when strictly necessary to park the tractor in buildings with low headroom;
for this operation DO NOT fasten the seat belt and drive the tractor with the maximum caution. Before resuming any
normal work return the ROPS to its vertical position and lock it in place.
WARNING
7

It is strictly prohibited to attach chains or ropes for pulling to the ROPS or the tractor may be caused to overturn.

To bring the ROPS to its folded position proceed as follows on both sides
of the structure:
8

l Remove the locking screw (if present on your ROPS version)


l Remove the lock pins (2) securing the pins (1).
l Remove the pins (1).
9

2 1

Fig. 80
10

3-22

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 22 08/02/2013 21.08.08


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
l Fold the ROPS backwards.
l Reposition pin (1) in the front hole as shown in the figure.

1
l Refit the lock pins.
l Refit the locking screw (if present on your ROPS version)
l Tighten the locking screw to a torque of 19.4 – 21.4 Nm (if present on your
ROPS version)
2

2
Fig. 81

WARNING

3
When a tractor equipped with a folding ROPS is being used in a situation in which it is necessary to lower the ROPS,
the seat belt must not be worn for as long as the ROPS is kept in the lowered position. This is to enable the operator
to jump off the tractor should be about to overturn. However, the seat belt must be used whenever the tractor is oper-
ated with the ROPS in the raised position.

3.5.6 - Hazard warning triangle

4
In compliance with national regulations, the tractor must be equipped with one or two hazard warning triangles. Store these in a
suitable place.
3.5.7 - Wheel chock
IMPORTANT:
If you need to park on a steep gradient � more than 15° (33% gradient) � place chocks under the rear wheels to im-

5
mobilise the tractor. It is any case recommended not to park the tractor on a steep gradient.

The wheel chocks must be used in the following situations:


l when the tractor is parked on a slope
l when carrying out repairs or maintenance.

6
The chocks are to be placed under the wheels as shown in the figure.

7
Fig. 82
8
9
10

3-23

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 23 08/02/2013 21.08.10


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.5.8 - Tool box
The tool box (1) is located on the right�hand side of the tractor, forward of the stone
1

guard

To open the tool box:


l Pull the hinge (2) upwards
l Open the cover (3)
2

Fig. 83
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

3-24

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 24 08/02/2013 21.08.13


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.6 - OTHER CONTROLS
3.6.1 - Control pedals

1
General view of the control pedals
1. Clutch pedal
2. Left brake pedal
3. Right brake pedal
4. Brake pedal connecting latch

2
5. Accelerator pedal

3
Fig. 84

3.6.2 - Clutch control pedal


CAUTION
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal or keep it partially depressed when driving as this could cause premature
wear of the clutch plates.

4
CAUTION
Do not depress the clutch pedal or put the gearbox in neutral when driving downhill.

5
CAUTION
Avoid keeping the clutch pedal depressed when the tractor is stationary. Select neutral, even when stopping for brief
periods.

The clutch disengages when the clutch pedal on the left of the operator position

6
is pressed.
When you intend to disengage the clutch first reduce engine revs and then press
the clutch pedal fully down.
When the pedal is released after selecting a gear, apply the accelerator pedal ap-
propriately to prevent sudden jolts in the movement of the tractor.
Once you have released the clutch pedal, remove your foot from it because even

7
slight pressure can result in accelerated wear of the clutch plate.

Fig. 85
8
3.6.3 - Brake pedal
WARNING
When travelling downhill, and particularly when towing an implement or trailer, avoid prolonged use of the brakes by
selecting a low gear and using the braking action of the engine.
9

WARNING
Do not brake using just one brake pedal when:
– the differential lock is engaged; – at high speeds; – when towing a trailer .
10

3-25

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 25 08/02/2013 21.08.25


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
The service brakes are hydrostatically�operated wet disc brakes.
The tractor is equipped with two brakes located on the rear axle shafts ahead of
1

the final drives and two front brakes (optional and only on 4WD versions) located
in the front wheel hubs.
The front and rear brakes are applied simultaneously by pressing the brake ped-
als.
If the latch (1) connecting the two pedals together is released, the right brakes (3)
may be operated separately from the left brakes (2).
2

1. Latch connecting the two brake pedals together


2. Left brake pedal
3. Right brake pedal
Fig. 86

3.6.4 - Parking brake lever


3

CAUTION
Apply the parking brake after shutting off the engine and before leaving the driving position. For further information
on safe working procedures, refer to the chapter “Working with stationary implements” in the safety section of this
manual.
CAUTION
4

When applying the parking brake, the lever must always be pulled up all the way

IMPORTANT
Every time you apply the parking always engage front�wheel drive as well.
5

The parking brake, which is completely independent from the service brakes, is
applied by pulling the lever (1) upwards.
To manually release the brake, press the button (2) at the end of the lever and
lower the lever (1).
6

2
7

Fig. 87

When the parking brake is applied, the warning light on the instrument panel illuminates.

P
8

Parking the tractor


The tractor must be parked differently depending on the terrain and operational status of the engine:
9

l Parking the tractor with the engine off


l Parking the tractor with the engine running;
l Parking the tractor on steep slopes
Parking the tractor with the engine off
l Apply the handbrake.
10

l Move all controls to the neutral position;


l Lower the 3�point linkage and any implement attached to the tractor, to the ground;
l Stop the engine;

3-26

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 26 08/02/2013 21.08.34


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
l Engage first gear on tractors with mechanical gearboxes.
l Engage front�wheel drive.

1
Parking the tractor with the engine running
l Check that no�one is in the vicinity of the tractor;
l Check that the tractor is parked on level ground;
l Apply the handbrake.
l Move all drive controls to the neutral position.
Parking the tractor on steep slopes

2
To park the tractor on slopes, proceed as indicated previously depending on the situation.
If it is necessary to park the tractor on a steep slope, even for a short time, position chocks under the rear wheels to prevent it from
moving. It is in any case preferable not to park the tractor on sloping terrain.
The chocks should normally be positioned under the rear wheels by a second person, who must stand to the side of the tractor at

3
all times.
If no assistant is available for this purpose, before alighting from the tractor the operator must fully engage the parking brake, check
that tractor is not moving, and then carefully position the chocks under the wheels while standing to the side of the tractor.
3.6.5 - Accelerator pedal
Use this pedal to vary the speed of the engine.

4
5
Fig. 88

3.6.6 - Mechanical hand throttle lever

6
CAUTION
When driving on the road, use the accelerator pedal only and never the hand throttle.

7
1. Mechanical hand throttle lever
2. Graduated scale

Fig. 89
9

The hand throttle control (1) consists of lever positioned on the instrument panel; the hand throttle serves to increase or decrease
engine speed.
Alongside the lever is a graduated scale (2) which indicates the engine speed.
Push the lever (1) forwards to increase the engine speed, pull the lever (1) back to decrease the engine speed.
The lever determines the minimum engine speed.
10

3-27

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 27 08/02/2013 21.08.36


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.6.7 - Transmission controls
12FWD+3REV transmission for 50-60-70 hp
1

CAUTION
Never go away and leave the tractor with the engine running, unless absolutely necessary. In this case, put all the gear
levers in “neutral” and pull the parking brake lever right up. For further information on safe working procedures, refer
to the chapter “Working with stationary implements” in the safety section of this manual.
2

The transmission is comprised of different units:


l a 15�speed gearbox (12 forward and 3 reverse speeds).
l 2 range gears and a creeper (L low � V high � SR creep).
The three reverse gears obtained using the main gear lever (R) and range gear lever (L � V � SR)
1. Main gear and reverse lever
3

2. Range and creeper lever


4

Fig. 90
5

Standard transmission for 40hp, optional for 50hp


l 10�speed gearbox (8 forward and 2 reverse speeds).
l 2 range gears (L low � V high )
The two reverse gears are selected using the main gear lever (R) and range gear lever (L � V)
1. Main gear and reverse lever
6
7

Fig. 91
8

1. Range gear lever


9

Fig. 92
10

3-28

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 28 08/02/2013 21.08.36


1
2
3
4
5
4 - USING THE TRACTOR

6
7
8
9
10

4-1

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 1 08/02/2013 21.08.38


USING THE TRACTOR
4.1 - INTRODUCTION
4.1.1 - Engine - first 50 operating hours
1

The tractor is delivered to the customer ready for use at full engine power thanks to the stringent testing phase that the engine
engine un-
un�
dergoes in our test room.
However, in the first 50 hours of use do not subject the tractor to full power full load operation for prolonged periods in order to allow
the piston rings to adapt properly to the cylinders and various moving parts to bed in correctly.
During this interval it is potentially harmful to run the engine at idle speed for prolonged periods and also to run it at high speeds in no
2

load conditions; this would result in bedding in of engine components in a manner different from that which would deliver maximum
efficiency throughout the full service life of the engine.

The safety seal on the engine governor is applied by the manufacturer and ensures that the power output of your
tractor does not exceed the declared and approved value. Any tampering with this seal on the governor will void the
3

warranty for the entire tractor with immediate effect.


In the first hours of use of the machine, the following procedures must be adhered to:
l At each start�up allow the engine to run at low speed for a few minutes;
l Do not use the engine continuously at low revs or at high revs with low loads;
l During the first 20 service hours do not use the engine with excessively high loads; use the tractor in full load conditions for
4

periods that are gradually longer;


l Before switching off the engine allow it to idle for a few minutes;
l Adopt due care and attention when performing the checks and servicing operations listed below:
m engine oil level
m engine oil change
m renewal of oil filter
5
6
7
8
9
10

4-2

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 2 08/02/2013 21.08.39


USING THE TRACTOR
4.2 - STARTING - STOPPING THE ENGINE
4.2.1 - Starting the engine (AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50

1
E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
->D10S653WT1E1001)
Before turning the ignition key you must:
l Sit in the operator’s seat
l Adjust the operator’s seat in accordance with your stature

2
l Fasten and adjust the seat belt
l Switch off all the electrical equipment powered by the battery (lights, direction indicators, etc.)
l Release the engine STOP; only in this condition is it possible to start up the engine.
l Move the gear lever and range lever to their neutral positions
l Apply the handbrake
l Move the rear PTO controls to the disengaged position

3
WARNING
Starting aid fluids are highly flammable. When using them, keep them away from any possible source of sparks (bat-
teries, connections, etc.). These fluids must be stored in a cool place.

The following abbreviations indicate the position of the ignition key.

4
l (0) � STOP: Switching off the engine.
l (1) � ON: The battery charging and low oil pressure warning lights on the
instrument panel light up.
l (2) � START: Starting the engine. Only start the engine after the preheating
indicator light has gone out (if it came on in the first place).

5
Fig. 93

6
Procedure for starting the engine
These tractors are equipped with electronic devices to make starting the engine and parking the tractor safe operations.
Insert the key in the starter switch and turn it to position (1). All the warning lights on the instrument panel will illuminate briefly for a
lamp test (this test is signalled by a buzzer).
In this position, the red warning lights indicating battery charging and low engine lubricating oil pressure remain on.

7
Start
l Depress the clutch pedal to enable starting and move the gear lever and shuttle lever to neutral.
l Start the engine by turning the key to position (2) and pressing the accelerator.
l Once the engine has started, release the key, which will automatically return to position (1).
Starting the engine when cold
8
CAUTION
After starting the engine in low temperature conditions, do not rev the engine above 1800 rpm until it reaches its op-
timum working temperature.

Diesel engines are to be refuelled exclusively with diesel fuel of the type normally commercially available and which conforms to the
requirements of the applicable standards.
9

In winter, when the temperature falls below 0° C, it is essential to use winter diesel fuel, which allows the engine to run correctly at
temperatures down to –20°C.
If summer diesel fuel is used at low temperatures, the molecules of paraffin contained in the fuel will be deposited on the filters which
will therefore become clogged and prevent the fuel from arriving at the injection pump.
10

Some markets offer winter diesel with the addition of special additives that make it suited to temperatures even below –20 °C.

4-3

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 3 08/02/2013 21.08.49


USING THE TRACTOR
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use ether based products to help start the engine when cold.
1

If winter diesel fuel is not available (or if it is used but the temperature is below
–20°C) kerosene (paraffin oil) may be added in the percentages indicated in the
diagram.
2

l 1 = summer diesel fuel


l 2 = winter diesel fuel
l X = % of kerosene to be added
l Y = ambient temperature in °C
3

Fig. 94

Pour first the kerosene and then the diesel into the fuel and mix the two substances in the tank only.
For further information, contact an authorised workshop, your dealer or fuel supplier.
4

Emergency engine starting using a second battery


DANGER
Make sure you connect the battery terminals correctly. Danger of short�circuit!
5

DANGER
Never start the engine by shorting across the terminals of the starter motor as the tractor could suddenly move off, with
a consequent risk of injury to the operator.

IMPORTANT
You can use the battery in another tractor for this purpose; only connect batteries of the same nominal voltage having
6

the same number of cells.

Before connecting up the cables, observe the following safety instructions:


l Make sure that the two vehicles are not touching each other.
l Switch off any unnecessary electrical equipment.
7

l Set the gear lever to neutral.


l Make sure the battery requiring assistance is properly connected to the vehicle chassis, that the caps are securely fitted, and
that the electrolyte level is correct.
To connect the two batteries, proceed as follows:
l Connect the terminals of a specific cable to the positive terminal of flat battery (1) and then to the positive terminal of auxiliary
battery (2).
8

l Connect the terminals of a second cable to the negative terminal of auxiliary battery (3) and then to the metal terminal of the
ground cable of the tractor with flat battery (4).
l If the auxiliary battery is on another tractor, first start its engine and take it up to a speed corresponding to 1/4 of the maximum
engine speed.
l Start the tractor with the discharged battery following the normal procedure.
l Once the engine has started up, disconnect the terminals of the cables, following the reverse order to connection, first terminal
9

(4), then (3), (2) and lastly (1).


If the engine fails to start, wait 15�20 seconds for the starter motor to stop, then repeat the procedure a maximum of 3 or 4 times. If
the tractor still fails to start, check for problems with the engine or electrical system (starter motor, etc.).
10

4-4

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 4 08/02/2013 21.08.59


USING THE TRACTOR
Diagram showing connection of batteries using jump leads
1. Positive terminal of the battery requiring assistance

1
2. Positive terminal of the back�up battery
3. Negative terminal of the back�up battery
4. Starter cable terminal connected to earth on the tractor with the battery
requiring assistance

2
Fig. 95

4.2.2 - Starting the engine (AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001)

3
Before turning the ignition key you must:
1. Sit in the operator’s seat.
2. Adjust the operator’s seat in accordance with your stature
3. Fasten and adjust the seat belt
4. Switch off all the electrical equipment powered by the battery (lights, direction indicators, etc.).
5. Apply the handbrake.

4
6. Move the gear lever and range lever to their neutral positions.
7. Move the rear PTO control to the disengaged position (warning light off).
8. Check the position of the control levers (lift completely lowered) to avoid accidental movements of the lift arms during the start�
up procedure caused by inadvertent operation of the levers when the engine was off.
WARNING

5
Starting aid fluids are highly flammable. When using them, keep them away from any possible source of sparks (bat-
teries, connections, etc.). These fluids must be stored in a cool place.

The following abbreviations indicate the position of the ignition key.


l (0) � STOP: Switching off the engine.
l (1) � ON: The battery charging and low oil pressure warning lights on the

6
instrument panel light up.
l (2) � START: Starting the engine. Only start the engine after the preheating
indicator light has gone out (if it came on in the first place).

Fig. 95
7
Procedure for starting the engine
These tractors are equipped with electronic devices to make starting the engine and parking the tractor safe operations.
8

Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to position 1. All the warning lights on the instrument panel will illuminate briefly for a
lamp test ((this test is accompanied by an audible signal).
In this position, the red warning lights indicating battery charging and low engine oil pressure, the yellow preheating warning light ( if
the temperature is below 30°C) and the orange front�wheel drive light will remain on.
The yellow warning light for the electronic preheating system may illuminate in two different ways:
9

1. A single brief flash, indicating that the engine may be started without activating the preheating system.
2. Rapid continuous flashing, indicating the need to activate the preheating system by pressing the corresponding button.
Starting without preheating
l Depress the clutch pedal to enable starting and move the gear lever and shuttle lever to neutral.
Start the engine by turning the key to position 2 and pressing the accelerator.
10

l
l When the engine starts, release the key, which will return to position 1.

4-5

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 5 08/02/2013 21.09.01


USING THE TRACTOR
Starting with preheating
l Depress the clutch pedal to enable starting and move the main gear lever and range gear lever to
1

neutral.

The yellow indicator light flashes continuously; activate the preheating system by briefly pressing
2

the button on the right of the instrument panel.


3

l The yellow preheating light will stop flashing and remain steadily on for about 10 seconds. Once the light has switched off, start
the tractor by turning the key to position 2 and pressing the accelerator.
When the engine starts, release the key, which will return to position 1.
At this point the electronic preheating control system will activate the post�heating stage, which will be signalled by the yellow
indicator light. The post�heating stage terminates automatically when the indicator light switches off. If necessary (for example:
persistent white smoke from the exhaust due to poor quality fuel) once the engine has started you can activate a further
4

post�heating stage simply by pressing button again (this operation can be performed at any time when the engine is running
regardless of whether or not the preheating stage was activated previously).
l NB: The user can interrupt the pre�heating function at any time simply be pressing the preheating button again. To reactivate
the system, you need to turn the key first to position and then back to position. CAUTION: If the battery charging warning
light stays on after the engine has started, the post�heating stage will not be activated; rev the engine briefly by pressing the
accelerator pedal until the light goes out.
5

Starting the engine when cold


CAUTION
After starting the engine in low temperature conditions, do not rev the engine above 1800 rpm until it reaches its op-
timum working temperature.
6

Diesel engines are to be refuelled exclusively with diesel fuel of the type normally commercially available and which conforms to the
requirements of the applicable standards.
In winter, when the temperature falls below 0° C, it is essential to use winter diesel fuel, which allows the engine to run correctly at
temperatures down to –20°C.
If summer diesel fuel is used at low temperatures, the molecules of paraffin contained in the fuel will be deposited on the filters which
7

will therefore become clogged and prevent the fuel from arriving at the injection pump.
Some markets offer winter diesel with the addition of special additives that make it suited to temperatures even below –20 °C.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use ether based products to help start the engine when cold.
8

If winter diesel fuel is not available (or if it is used but the temperature is below
–20°C) kerosene (paraffin oil) may be added in the percentages indicated in the
diagram.
l 1 = summer diesel fuel
9

l 2 = winter diesel fuel


l X = % of kerosene to be added
l Y = ambient temperature in °C
10

Fig. 95

4-6

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 6 08/02/2013 21.09.06


USING THE TRACTOR
Pour first the kerosene and then the diesel into the fuel and mix the two substances in the tank only.
For further information, contact an authorised workshop, your dealer or fuel supplier.

1
Emergency engine starting using a second battery
DANGER
Make sure you connect the battery terminals correctly. Danger of short�circuit!

2
DANGER
Never start the engine by shorting across the terminals of the starter motor as the tractor could suddenly move off, with
a consequent risk of injury to the operator.

IMPORTANT

3
You can use the battery in another tractor for this purpose; only connect batteries of the same nominal voltage having
the same number of cells.

Before connecting up the cables, observe the following safety instructions:


l Make sure that the two vehicles are not touching each other.
l Switch off any unnecessary electrical equipment.

4
l Set the gear lever to neutral.
l Make sure the battery requiring assistance is properly connected to the vehicle chassis, that the caps are securely fitted, and
that the electrolyte level is correct.
To connect the two batteries, proceed as follows:
l Connect the terminals of a specific cable to the positive terminal of flat battery (1) and then to the positive terminal of auxiliary

5
battery (2).
l Connect the terminals of a second cable to the negative terminal of auxiliary battery (3) and then to the metal terminal of the
ground cable of the tractor with flat battery (4).
l If the auxiliary battery is on another tractor, first start its engine and take it up to a speed corresponding to 1/4 of the maximum
engine speed.
l Start the tractor with the discharged battery following the normal procedure.

6
l Once the engine has started up, disconnect the terminals of the cables, following the reverse order to connection, first terminal
(4), then (3), (2) and lastly (1).
If the engine fails to start, wait 15�20 seconds for the starter motor to stop, then repeat the procedure a maximum of 3 or 4 times. If
the tractor still fails to start, check for problems with the engine or electrical system (starter motor, etc.).
Diagram showing connection of batteries using jump leads

7
1. Positive terminal of the battery requiring assistance
2. Positive terminal of the back�up battery
3. Negative terminal of the back�up battery
4. Starter cable terminal connected to earth on the tractor with the battery
requiring assistance
8

Fig. 95
9

4.2.3 - Stopping the engine


Before stopping the engine, proceed as follows:
10

4-7

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 7 08/02/2013 21.09.11


USING THE TRACTOR
l If the engine is very hot (especially if the engine is turbocharged), leave it
to idle for a few minutes before stopping it.
1

l Put the main gear lever into neutral and apply the parking brake.
l Pull the engine stop knob (1) and turn the starter key (3) to position 0 �
STOP.
l Pull the device (2) to prepare the engine for restarting.
2

Fig. 96

4.2.4 - Dismounting from the tractor safely


3

Safety conditions
The procedure for dismounting from the tractor safely depends on whether the engine is running or stopped and on whether the
tractor is parked on flat ground or on a slope.
Dismounting from the tractor with the engine running
WARNING
4

If it is necessary to dismount from the tractor, even temporarily, when it is parked on a steep slope, position chocks
under the rear wheels to prevent it from moving.

To dismount from the tractor with the engine running, proceed as follows:
1. Stop the tractor;
Pull the lever up to apply the parking brake;
5

2.
3. Put the gear lever in neutral;
4. Check that no�one is in the vicinity of the tractor;
5. If the PTO is not in use, put the PTO speed selector lever in neutral;
6. Move the PTO clutch control lever to the “engaged” position;
7. Put all remote valve control levers in neutral, unless the remote valves are in use;
8. Alight from the tractor.
6

Dismounting from the tractor with the engine stopped


WARNING
If it is necessary to dismount from the tractor, even temporarily, when it is parked on a steep slope, position chocks
under the rear wheels to prevent it from moving.
7

To dismount from the tractor with the engine stopped, proceed as follows:
1. Stop the tractor;
2. Pull the lever up to apply the parking brake;
3. Put the gear lever in neutral;
4. Check that four�wheel drive is engaged;
Check that no�one is in the vicinity of the tractor;
8

5.
6. Lower the 3�point linkage and any implement attached to the tractor, to the ground;
7. Put all remote valve control levers in neutral, unless the remote valves are in use;
8. Check that the PTO speed selector lever is in neutral and that the PTO clutch control lever is in the “engaged” position;
9. Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key;
10. Engage first gear, checking that the range gear and the shuttle (if present) are also engaged;
11. Alight from the tractor.
9

4.2.5 - Turbocharging using the turbocharger


The function of the turbocharger is to deliver a greater amount of air to the cylinders; this also makes it possible to increase the fuel
flow rate in a proportional manner in order to increase engine power.
The turbocharger unit, which features simple and rational design, consists of a turbine and a compressor.
10

The turbine is driven by the engine exhaust gas (this recovering part of the kinetic energy of the gas which would otherwise be
be di-
di�
spersed) and it drives the compressor, which serves to compress the intake air drawn into the cylinder intake manifold through the
air cleaner.

4-8

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 8 08/02/2013 21.09.13


USING THE TRACTOR
The following operating instructions must be observed in order to avoid damaging the engine, and particularly the turbo
charger:

1
l Never accelerate to max revs with a cold engine. Run the engine at idle speed for 1�2 minutes to allow the oil to heat up gradu-
ally to ensure perfect lubrication of the turbine (the turbocharger is lubricated with engine oil).
l Before stopping the engine after several hours of heavy harvesting work, allow it to idle for approximately 2 minutes; this is to
prevent the turbo from coasting at high speed without adequate lubrication.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4-9

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 9 08/02/2013 21.09.13


USING THE TRACTOR
4.3 - TRANSMISSION
4.3.1 - Transmission
1

12FWD+3REV transmission for 50-60-70 hp


CAUTION
Never go away and leave the tractor with the engine running, unless absolutely necessary. In this case, put all the gear
levers in “neutral” and pull the parking brake lever right up. For further information on safe working procedures, refer
to the chapter “Working with stationary implements” in the safety section of this manual.
2

l a 15�speed gearbox (12 forward and 3 reverse speeds).


l 2 range gears and a creeper (L low � V high � SR creep).
The three reverse gears obtained using the main gear lever (R) and range gear lever (L � V � SR)
1. Main gear lever
3

2. Range gear lever


4

Fig. 97
5

Standard transmission for 40hp, optional for 50hp


l 10�speed gearbox (8 forward and 2 reverse speeds).
l Two ranges Snail (low)� Hare (high).
The two reverse gears are selected using the main gear lever (R) and range gear lever (Snail � Hare)
1. Main gear lever
6

2. Range gear lever


7

Fig. 98
8
9
10

4-10

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 10 08/02/2013 21.09.16


USING THE TRACTOR
4.4 - FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE - DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
4.4.1 - Engaging front-wheel drive

1
Engaging front�wheel drive in addition to the permanent rear�wheel drive, increases performance for transport on steep roads, rough
terrain and when increased traction is required.
IMPORTANT
We recommend that front�wheel drive be used during road transport only if increased traction is required. This is to
prevent unnecessary tyre wear.

2
IMPORTANT
Engaging and disengaging front�wheel drive is possible only when the tractor is at a complete standstill.

3
IMPORTANT
Always engage front�wheel drive when you apply the parking brake.

Mechanical engagement of front-wheel drive

4
To engage front�wheel drive, pull control lever (1) located to the left of the operator; 540

the lever will remain locked in position. N

To disengage front�wheel drive, press lever (1), which will return to the rest posi- PTO

tion.

5
1
P

Fig. 99

6
On top of the lever there is a plate illustrating how to use the control.

7
8

Fig. 100

4.4.2 - Front and rear differential locks


WARNING
Do not engage the differential lock in the following circumstances. speed greater than 15 km/h – when driving round
9

bends – with a single brake pedal depressed.

IMPORTANT
Never engage the differential locks while a wheel is slipping excessively; in this situation, always depress the clutch
pedal before engaging the differential locks.
10

4-11

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 11 08/02/2013 21.09.27


USING THE TRACTOR
IMPORTANT
DO NOT travel on roads or at high speed when the differential lock is engaged. This could make steering difficult and
1

thus cause accidents, injury and damage.

The tractor is always equipped with a rear differential lock; the front differential lock is optional.
The differential locks are only to be engaged when travelling in a straight line and before the wheels start to slip excessively.
The differential locks are operated mechanically; to lock the differentials, depress
2

pedal (1).
3

Fig. 101
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4-12

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 12 08/02/2013 21.09.28


USING THE TRACTOR
4.5 - BRAKING
4.5.1 - Brakes, “SEPARATE BRAKES” Valve

1
WARNING
During road transport, the two brake pedals must be always latched together. This is to ensure even braking on both
sides of the tractor and maximum braking efficiency. Tight bends must be taken at low speed.

This device enables braking on the rear wheels only, when the brake pedals are operated separately. This prevents skidding of the

2
front wheel during separate braking and thus helps avoid damage to crops since the front wheel is not braked.
Different types of braking action can be obtained by adjusting this valve.
All�wheel braking
When both brake pedals are operated simultaneously (pedals latched together).
This is strongly recommended for transport, transfers between fields and when

3
working on slopes.

4
Fig. 102

Braking on the two inner wheels only

5
For minimum turning radius in restricted spaces and to reduce time spent in head-
land manoeuvres.

6
Fig. 103

7
Braking on rear inner wheel only
For minimum turning radius on worked ground.
8
9

Fig. 104
10

4-13

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 13 08/02/2013 21.09.28


USING THE TRACTOR
The braking actions described above are selected according to the position
of the valve, as shown in the following diagram.
1

l A � Valve position
l B � Brake pedal
l b1 - Left
l b2 - Right
l b3 - Latched
l ON � Braking on one wheel
2

l OFF� Lateral braking

Fig. 105

“Separate brakes” valve


3

1. Brake valve (on right�hand side under instrument panel)


2. Control knob.
4

Fig. 106
5
6
7
8
9
10

4-14

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 14 08/02/2013 21.09.29


USING THE TRACTOR
4.6 - REAR PTO
4.6.1 - Rear PTO

1
Definition
The power take�off (PTO) is a shaft (1) that transfers power from the engine to
implements attached to the tractor.
1

2
3
Fig. 107

Versions
This tractor may be fitted with one of the following two PTO versions:
2 speeds: 540 and 750 rpm (540 ECO)

4
l
l 1 speed: 540 rpm
Controls
The PTO is operated using two controls:
l Rear PTO speed selector lever
PTO clutch control lever

5
l

Rear PTO speed selector lever


On the 2�speed version (540 and 750 rpm), the lever positions are determined by
3 notches:
Notch 1: Neutral

6
7
Fig. 108

Notch 2: 540 rpm


8
9

Fig. 109
10

4-15

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 15 08/02/2013 21.09.31


USING THE TRACTOR
Notch 3: 750 rpm (540 ECO)
1
2

Fig. 110

On the single�speed version (540 rpm), the lever positions are determined by 2
3

notches: 2

l Notch 1: Neutral (lever in notch)


l Notch 2: 540 rpm (lever in notch) 1
4

Fig. 111
5

IMPORTANT
Always make sure that the PTO speed selector lever is fully engaged in the notch.

NOTE
To select different PTO speed, refer to the position markings alongside the PTO speed selector lever.
6

PTO clutch control lever


Positions:
Fully down (PTO clutch engaged)
7
8

Fig. 112
9
10

4-16

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 16 08/02/2013 21.09.43


USING THE TRACTOR
Fully up (PTO clutch disengaged)

1
2
Fig. 113

Indicator lights

3
1

4
2
15 20
10
1/2 5 25
E F

30 C

5
PTO

6
Fig. 114

7
Instrument panel
1. Rear PTO speed selector indicator light
m Orange light ON: signals that a PTO rotation speed is selected

2. Rear PTO clutch disengaged indicator light


m Red light ON - Indicates PTO clutch disengaged
8

Use of the PTO


Before using the system:
l Bring the engine to idle speed
l Set the PTO clutch control lever to the disengaged position
9

On the instrument panel:


m Red PTO clutch “disengaged” indicator light ON

m Orange PTO speed selector indicator light OFF


10

Fig. 114

4-17

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 17 08/02/2013 21.09.47


USING THE TRACTOR
PTO speed selection
IMPORTANT
1

Always make sure that the PTO speed selector lever is fully engaged in the notch.

NOTE
When selecting different speeds always check the printed label alongside the lever.
2

Select the required PTO rotation speed (540 rpm in the example illustrated).

On the instrument panel:


l Red PTO clutch “disengaged” indicator light ON
3

l Orange PTO speed selector indicator light ON


4

Fig. 114

Engagement
WARNING
Before activating any implements connected to the PTO shaft, check that no�one is in the vicinity of the implement or
5

its maximum operating radius.

To activate the PTO move the PTO clutch control lever to its fully down position. To
move the lever press the button on the end and push it downwards.
6

On the instrument panel:


l Red PTO clutch “disengaged” indicator light OFF
l Orange PTO speed selector indicator light ON
7

Fig. 114

Disengagement
WARNING
8

Before dismounting from the tractor, check that the PTO speed selector lever is located in the neutral notch and that
the PTO clutch control lever is in the PTO “engaged” position. For other see the section “Dismounting from the tractor
safely”.
WARNING
Before entering the operating range of the implement, wait until the implement has come to complete stop, shut off
9

the tractor engine and remove the key from the ignition switch. For all other indications see the section “Coupling and
uncoupling of PTO�driven implements”.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to moving parts, do not leave the PTO clutch disengaged for any longer than necessary.
10

4-18

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 18 08/02/2013 21.10.01


USING THE TRACTOR
To disengage the rear PTO, proceed as follows:
1. Throttle the engine back to idle speed;

1
2. Disengage the PTO by setting the PTO clutch control lever to neutral (top
position).
On the instrument panel:
m Red PTO clutch “disengaged” indicator light ON
m Orange PTO speed selector indicator light ON

2
Fig. 114

Technical data

3
IMPORTANT
Adhere to and do no exceed the speeds recommended by the manufacturer of the implement.

Listed below are the PTO speeds and the corresponding engine speeds:

4
Table 3 - Technical data
AGROLUX 45 E AGROLUX 50 E AGROLUX 60 E AGROLUX 70 E
->D10S403WX1E5001 ->D10S453WT1E1001 ->D10S553WT1E1001 ->D10S653WT1E1001

04 - REAR PTO
PTO 540 – Engine rpm: X X X X

5
AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001

04 - REAR PTO

6
PTO 540 – Engine rpm: X

Table 4 - Technical data


AGROLUX 45 E AGROLUX 50 E AGROLUX 60 E AGROLUX 70 E
->D10S403WX1E5001 ->D10S453WT1E1001 ->D10S553WT1E1001 ->D10S653WT1E1001

04 - REAR PTO

7
540 ECO PTO - Engine X X X X
rpm:

AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001


8

04 - REAR PTO
540 ECO PTO � Engine rpm: X

4.6.2 - Coupling and uncoupling of PTO-driven implements


Coupling implements
9

WARNING
Before coupling an implement to the PTO, refer to the instruction supplied with the implement to determine the mini-
mum and maximum power requirements to check that these are compatible with the power output of the tractor.
10

4-19

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 19 08/02/2013 21.10.03


USING THE TRACTOR
WARNING
Always adhere to the instructions given in the use and installation manual supplied by the manufacturer of the drive
1

shaft.

To couple the drive shaft of an implement to the tractor PTO, proceed as follows:
1. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition;
2. Make sure that the rear PTO speed selector lever is in the neutral position;
3. Hitch the implement to the tractor (see sections “3�point hitch” or Towing hitches”);
2

4. Remove the PTO shaft shield;


5. Turn the shaft by hand to align the splines;
6. Couple the drive shaft to the tractor PTO and to the implement.
7. Make sure that all the shields and guards are in good condition and positioned correctly.
Uncoupling implements
3

WARNING
Before entering the operating range of the implement, wait until the implement has come to complete stop, shut off the
tractor engine and remove the key from the ignition switch.

To uncouple the drive shaft of an implement from the tractor PTO, proceed as follows:
4

1. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition;
2. Make sure that the rear PTO speed selector lever is in the neutral position;
3. Uncouple the drive shaft from the tractor PTO and fr4om the implement;
4. Unhitch the implement from the tractor (see sections “3�point hitch” or Towing hitches”);
5. Refit the PTO shaft shield;
6. Make sure that all the shields and guards are in good condition and positioned correctly.
5
6
7
8
9
10

4-20

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 20 08/02/2013 21.10.04


USING THE TRACTOR
4.7 - HYDRAULIC REAR LIFT
4.7.1 - Hydraulic lift

1
WARNING
Make sure no�one is in the vicinity of the implement before using the hydraulic lift.

WARNING

2
Always lower the implement to the ground when the tractor is not in operation or when carrying out maintenance,
repairs or adjustments.

WARNING
Never use the lift links for towing implements. Only tow implements using the homologated towbars or towing hitches.

3
Towing or hitching using other points of the tractor can cause the machine to overturn.

WARNING
Do not stand or allow anyone else to stand between the tractor and the implement, unless the engine is shut off and
the key removed from the starter switch, the parking brake applied, a gear engaged and all attachments or implements

4
lowered to the ground.
WARNING
If the tractor is equipped with rear mechanical lift, before starting the engine check the position of the control levers
(lift fully lowered), to avoid accidental movements of the lift arms during the start�up procedure caused by inadvertent
repositioning of the levers when the engine was off.

5
WARNING
Before switching off the engine, fully lower the rear lift.

The tractor is equipped with a lift of the following type:

6
l hydraulic rear lift with load�sensing mechanical control;

4.7.2 - Rear lift with mechanical “LOAD SENSING” control


Lift diagram
The rear lift unit for the control of mounted implements, semi-mounted implements and trailed implements is comprised

7
of:
l a hydraulic unit positioned above the PTO casing;
l a three�point linkage to which the implements to be lifted are attached.
The mechanically controlled hydraulic lift unit has the following functions:
l automatic implement position control;
8
l automatic draft control;
l mixed draft/position control;
l automatic control of implement drop rate with “Valvematic” system;
l rapid implement entry;
l hydraulic control of external implements.
l floating position
9
10

4-21

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 21 08/02/2013 21.10.06


USING THE TRACTOR
1
2
3
4

Fig. 115 - Lift components diagram (3-point linkage)


5

1. Lift cover
2. Top link
3. Lift rod
4. Lower links
5. Lift arms
6. Levelling box
7. Sensing device
6

8. When the top link is attached at hole 8, the lifting capacity is increased
9. When the top link is attached at hole 9, the lifting height is increased
10. Category I - 460 mm
Category II - 510 mm
Lift controls
7

DANGER
On tractors with mechanically controlled lifts, if the controls are operated while the engine is shut off, the lift will move
the arms the moment the engine is started.

The lift controls are composed of two levers on the driver’s right:
lift control lever;
8

l
l depth control lever;
9
10

4-22

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 22 08/02/2013 21.10.08


USING THE TRACTOR
Lift control lever (Lever 1)
This lever controls rotation of the lift arms and thus the height of the lower links.

1
2
Fig. 116

3
The control lever quadrant is divided into coloured sectors with different functions:
l blue “POSITION” sector, used to raise and lower the implement, to determine the desired working position and for mixed
draft�position control;
l yellow “CONTR” sector, in work with controlled position;
l red “FLOAT” sector, to enable the implement to follow the profile of the ground.
The control lever quadrant is equipped with a stop screw that makes it easy to return the lever to the same position repeatedly.

4
Depth control lever (Lever 2)
This lever causes the top link to extend, making it possible to control the required
working depth automatically according to the resistance that the implement en-
counters in the soil.
The range of action of this lever is indicated by the green quadrant and the num-

5
bers 0 to 12 on the graduated scale.
The control lever quadrant is equipped with a stop screw that makes it easy to
return the lever to the same position repeatedly.

6
Fig. 117

Positions of the lift levers in different working conditions

7
8
9

Fig. 118 - Control lever quadrants


1. Position - blue sector
10

2. Draft control - green sector


3. Float position � red sector
4. Mix � draft/position � yellow sector

4-23

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 23 08/02/2013 21.10.11


USING THE TRACTOR
1
2
3

Fig. 118 - Control lever quadrants


5. Lowering
6. Raising
Control � yellow sector
4

7.
Implement raising/lowering
l To raise the implement, pull lever 1 back (in the “POSITION” sector), to reach the desired height.
l To lower it push the lever 1 forward, to the limit of the “POSITION” sector.
l Lever 2 should be positioned on No. 12 of its quadrant.
5

Transfer with implement raised


l Lever 1 must be pulled back to its limit.
l Lever 2 should be positioned on No. 12 of its quadrant.
Position control operations (rotary harrows, cultivators, fertilizer spreaders, etc.)
l Lever 2 should be positioned on No. 12 of its quadrant.
Move lever 1 along the “POSITION” sector until it reaches the desired working position, and block it with the retainer bolt so
6

as to be able to return to the same position on subsequent passes.


Draft control operations (ploughs, rigid tine cultivators, ditch diggers, etc.)
l Move lever 2 to position No. 4 or 5 of its quadrant.
l Push lever 1 into the “FLOAT” sector to engage the implement rapidly with the soil.
l Pull lever 1 into the “CONTR” sector.
7

l Push lever 2 forwards to the desired working depth, and position the stop screw so as to be able to return to the same position
on subsequent passes.
l At the end of the furrow, simply pull lever 1 back to its limit to raise the implement out of the soil. At the start of the next furrow,
push lever 1 into the “FLOAT” sector and leave it there until the implement reaches the required working depth, at which point
the lever must be immediately returned to the “CONTR” sector.
8

Operations with implements that work in or on the surface of the soil with mixed draft/position control
l When working on terrain of variable consistency, to prevent the implement from sinking to below the required depth in lighter
soils, set the lift control levers to obtain mixed draft and position control.
l To achieve mixed control start working and position the levers as illustrated for “draft control operations”, then move lever 1
backwards along the “POSITION” sector until the implement starts to lift. Now move the lever forwards slightly (1�2 mm) in
order to immobilise the implement in its current position.
9

Float control operations (e.g. seed drill)


l When you want the implement to follow the contours of the land, push lever 1 into the “FLOAT” sector.
l Lever 2 may be in any position between no. 6 and no. 12 of its quadrant.
l At the end and start of each pass, use only lever 1 to raise and lower the implement.
10

4-24

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 24 08/02/2013 21.10.12


USING THE TRACTOR
4.8 - 3-POINT LINKAGE
4.8.1 - 3-point linkage

1
The tractor’s three�point linkage is used to attach implements operated by the hydraulic lift.
WARNING
Hitching to the rear axle or any other point above the swinging drawbar or the centre of rear wheels can cause the
tractor to tip over backwards.

2
Note:
When adjusting the length of the top link of the 3�point linkage, take care that it does not come apart and ensure that a
sufficient length of the threaded end of the turnbuckle is screwed into the turnbuckle housing to withstand the tractive
force applied when working.
This tractor, if appropriately adjusted, can mount category I and II implements.

3
The lengths of the top link and the lift rods can be adjusted by way of threaded sleeves fitted with handles.
The three-point linkage can have several adjustments:
l Manual adjustment of the lift rods
l Manual adjustment of the top link
l Adjustment of the telescopic stabilisers

4
5
6
7
Fig. 119 - 3-point linkage
1. Top link
8

2. Upper lift arm


3. Lift rod
4. Stabiliser
5. Lower link
Manual adjustment of the lift rods
9

By adjusting the lifting rods it is possible to vary the transverse angle of the implements.
WARNING
When working with the 3�point linkage, keep well clear of the operating radius of the lift arms and any attached imple-
ment. This is to avoid the risk of injury in the case of incorrect manoeuvres.
10

4-25

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 25 08/02/2013 21.10.17


USING THE TRACTOR
CAUTION
Always check that the weight of the implement is compatible with the maximum permissible load on the tractor axles.
1

The lift rods are adjusted as follows:


l unhook the handle (1) from the catch (2);
l turn the handle (1) clockwise to lengthen the rod and anticlockwise to short-
2

en it.

The lift rods can be anchored to the lower arms by means of a fixed pivot (3) or by
means of a slot (4). Using the slot (4) facilitates the implement attachment, more-
over it allows wider implements to freely follow the ground contours for certain
specific applications.
3

Fig. 120

Manual adjustment of the top link


This adjustment serves to position the implement at the correct angle to the ground. Shortening the top link increases the angle;
lengthening the top link reduces the angle.
4

The top link is adjusted as follows:


l unhook the top link (2) from the retaining bracket (1);
l turn the lock wheel (3) anticlockwise to release the top link;
l turn the top link to reach the desired length;
l turn the lock wheel (3) clockwise to lock the top link;
5

l hook the top link to the retaining bracket (1).


6

Fig. 121

Normally, when the lower links are in a horizontal position, the top link should be
at an angle, with the rear end uppermost.
The distance between the lower links and the top link must never be less than 510
mm for category II implements and 460 mm for category I implements.
7
8

Fig. 122

Adjustment of the telescopic stabilisers


WARNING
Never enter the area between the tractor and the implement when the tractor is in motion. Always lower the implement
9

before stopping the tractor.

The telescopic stabilisers serve to prevent or limit the sideways movement of the implement.
10

4-26

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 26 08/02/2013 21.10.23


USING THE TRACTOR
The amount of movement permitted depends on the position in which the
lock pin is inserted:

1
l rigid with no movement � insert the lock pin in hole 1;
l limited movement � insert the lock pin in hole 2;
l the middle hole in the sleeve (3) is used to turn the sleeve, by inserting a
rod.

2
Fig. 123

The stabilisers must be locked (lock pin in hole 1) during implement transport and when working with a levelling blade, excavator,
roller, mower, seeder, drill and other similar implements.

3
The stabilisers should allow a little movement (lock pin in hole 2), when working with ploughs, harrows, ditchers, cultivators and
similar implements; or when working in draft control mode.
To adjust the length of the stabilisers, remove the lock pin and turn the threaded coupling sleeve.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4-27

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 27 08/02/2013 21.10.24


USING THE TRACTOR
4.9 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
4.9.1 - Hydraulic system (AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50
1

E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E


->D10S653WT1E1001)
Note:
If the pump becomes noisy when the hydraulic system is hot, the hydraulic oil filter may be dirty. In this case, replace
the oil filter immediately.
2

All the hydraulic devices on the tractor (with the exception of the brakes, which have their own hydrostatic system) share a common
hydraulic system.
Pressurised oil is supplied by two hydraulic pumps, which are constantly engaged to the drive from the engine. The pumps are
are loca-
loca�
ted on the left-hand side of the engine.
3

l The higher capacity pump (14 cc, 31 l ) supplies oil under pressure to the trailer brake valve (optional), the remote control
valves and the hydraulic rear lift. It draws oil directly from the gearbox.
l The smaller capacity pump (8cc 17 l) supplies oil to the hydrostatic steering control valve, from which it is discharged to the
gearbox, where it is used for forced lubrication of the gears and shafts.
The hydraulic system is equipped with a 44 micron filter located on the left�hand side of the gearbox.
4

4.9.2 - Hydraulic system (AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001)


Note:
If the pump becomes noisy when the hydraulic system is hot, the hydraulic oil filter may be dirty. In this case, replace
the oil filter immediately.
5

All the hydraulic devices on the tractor (with the exception of the brakes, which have their own hydrostatic system) share a common
hydraulic system.
Pressurised oil is supplied by two hydraulic pumps, which are constantly engaged to the drive from the engine. The pumps are
are loca-
loca�
ted on the left-hand side of the engine.
l The higher capacity pump (19 cc, 42 l. ) supplies oil under pressure to the trailer brake valve (optional), the remote control
6

valves and the hydraulic rear lift. It draws oil directly from the gearbox.
l The smaller capacity pump (8cc 17 l) supplies oil to the hydrostatic steering control valve, from which it is discharged to the
gearbox, where it is used for lubrication of the gears and shafts.
The hydraulic system is equipped with a 44 micron filter located on the left�hand side of the gearbox.
4.9.3 - Auxiliary hydraulic control valve
7

The auxiliary hydraulic control valve is a device equipped with a control lever that serves to route oil from a pressurised circuit to one
or more outlet ports, thereby enabling the control of external implements with hydraulic actuators and making it possible to meet all
application requirements.
l The control valves are of the DOUBLE�ACTING type.

WARNING
8

Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing
serious injury, blindness or even death. High�pressure fluid leaks
may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking
for leaks. NEVER use your hands. Wear safety goggles to protect
your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate at-
9

tention from medical personnel with experience of this particular


problem.

Fig. 124
10

4-28

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 28 08/02/2013 21.10.30


USING THE TRACTOR
Double�acting remote control valve.
When the control lever is moved in one direction, the control valve spool shifts to

1
allow pressurised oil to flow out through one port and return through a second port.
When the control lever is moved in the opposite direction, the direction of flow is
reversed.

The control lever has 3 positions:


l 1 - outlet

2
l 0 - neutral
l 2 - outlet

Fig. 125

DETENT device
This is a mechanical detent that engages the control valve spool (which keeps the

3
lever in position) when the spool is moved to the end of its stroke. The device can
only be released manually by operating the control lever.
If the spool is not equipped with a DETENT, the control lever will always return to
the NEUTRAL position when released by the operator.

4
The control lever has 4 positions:
l 1 - outlet
l 0 - neutral
l 2 - return
l DETENT Fig. 126

Non�return valve (check valve)

5
Mechanically operated check valve that prevents leakage past the control valve
spool and thus undesired movements of the hydraulic cylinders.

6
Fig. 127

7
FLOW DIVIDER
Allows the oil flow rate to be set, independently of the pressure, in a certain port of
the double�acting control valve. 8
9

Fig. 128

WARNING
Do not stand or pass underneath hydraulically supported loads.
10

4-29

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 29 08/02/2013 21.10.33


USING THE TRACTOR
4.9.4 - Types of remote control valve (AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001, AGRO-
LUX 50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
1

->D10S653WT1E1001)
The tractor may be equipped with 3 different types of remote control valve:
l 2�way remote control valve
m 2 way, double�acting convertible to single�acting with detent);

l 4�way remote control valve


2

m 2 way � double�acting with return spring;


m 2�way � double�acting equipped with detent;

l 6�way control valve (only for North America market)


m 2 way � double�acting with return spring;
m 2�way � double�acting equipped with detent;
m 2�way � double�acting equipped with float;
3

Diagram of remote control valve (2-way version)


l 1 � Remote control valve 1
m 1A � Supply line coupler for cylinder extension

1B - Return line coupler


l 2 � Pressure relief valve
4

l 3 � Lock valve RSM3


l P - Oil inlet
l T - Oil drain
l T1 � H.P.C.O. � Drain for supply line to hydraulic rear lift
5

Fig. 129

Diagram of remote control valve (4-way version)


l 1 � Remote control valve 1
m 1A � Supply line coupler for cylinder extension

1B - Return line coupler


6

l 2 � Remote control valve 2


m 2A � Supply line coupler for cylinder extension

2B - Return line coupler


l 3 � Pressure relief valve
l 4 � Lock valve RSM3
l P - Oil inlet
7

l T - Oil drain
l T1 � H.P.C.O. � Drain for supply line to hydraulic rear lift Fig. 130
8
9

Fig. 131 - Diagram of hydraulic control valve (6-way version)


10

4-30

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 30 08/02/2013 21.10.35


USING THE TRACTOR

1
2
3
Fig. 131 - Diagram of hydraulic control valve (6-way version)
l 1 � Remote control valve 1
m 1A � Supply line coupler for cylinder extension

1B - Return line coupler


l 2 � Remote control valve 2
m 2A � Supply line coupler for cylinder extension

4
2B - Return line coupler
l 3 � Control valve 3
m 3A � Supply line coupler for cylinder extension

3B - Return line coupler


l 4 � Pressure relief valve
5 � Lock valve RSM3

5
l
l P - Oil inlet
l T - Oil drain
l T1 � H.P.C.O. � Drain for supply line to hydraulic rear lift

4.9.5 - Types of remote control valve (AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001)


The tractor may be equipped with 3 different types of auxiliary control valve:

6
l 2�way auxiliary control valve
m 2 double�acting ways that are convertible to single�acting and are equipped with detents;

l 4�way auxiliary control valve


m 2 way � double�acting with return spring;
m 2�way � double�acting equipped with detent;

7
l 6�way control valve
m 2 way � double�acting with return spring;
m 2�way � double�acting equipped with detent;
m 2�way � double�acting equipped with float;

Diagram of control valve (2-way version)


8

1. Double�acting control valve equipped with detent


2. Double�acting control valve with return spring
3. Pressure relief valve
4. Oil inlet
9

Fig. 132
10

4-31

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 31 08/02/2013 21.10.38


USING THE TRACTOR
4-way auxiliary control valve
1. Double�acting control valve equipped with detent
1

2. Pressure relief valve


3. Double/single acting conversion screw
4. Oil inlet
5. Drain
2

Fig. 133

6-way control valve with lock valve


3

1. Double�acting control valve with return spring


2. Double�acting control valve equipped with detent
3. Double�acting control valve equipped with kick�out and float position
4. Pressure relief valve
5. Oil inlet
6. Drain
Hydraulic coupler with lock valve RSM3
4

7.

Fig. 134

4.9.6 - Remote valve controls (AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX


5

50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E


->D10S653WT1E1001)
WARNING
The hydraulic control valve levers must be returned to their neutral positions as soon as the external rams reach their
6

stroke limit, in order to avoid maintaining maximum pressure in the hydraulic circuit for longer than necessary, as this
could dangerously overload the system.
The manual controls of the remote control valve consist of:
l 1 � Control lever for remote valve lines
l 2 � Control lever for hydraulic lines adjacent to the fender (in the case of
7

4�way remote control valve)

Tractors with a 2�way remote control valve are equipped with one lever.
Tractors with a 4�way remote control valve are equipped with two levers.
8

Fig. 135

These control levers are located to the right of the driver and have three positions:
1. NEUTRAL
Move the lever into the MIDDLE POSITION to stop the flow of oil both delivered to the lift cylinder and returned from the lift
9

cylinder.
2. RAISE
Move the lever BACKWARDS to extend the cylinder and lift the implement.
3. LOWER
Move the lever FORWARDS to retract the cylinder and lower the implement. In the case of a double�acting control valve, the
10

implement lowering action is controlled hydraulically, while in the case of a single�acting valve the lowering action is deter-
mined by the weight of the implement that causes the oil to discharge from the cylinder

4-32

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 32 08/02/2013 21.10.43


USING THE TRACTOR
In the case of remote control valves with just one control lever, the lever is equipped with a DETENT and therefore will remain in the
position to which it is moved. In the case of remote control valves with two control levers, only lever (2) is equipped with a DETENT
and therefore will remain in the position to which it is moved. The other lever is fitted with a return spring and will return to the NEU-

1
TRAL position when released.
4.9.7 - Remote valve controls (AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001)
WARNING
The hydraulic control valve levers must be returned to their neutral positions as soon as the external rams reach their

2
stroke limit, in order to avoid maintaining maximum pressure in the hydraulic circuit for longer than necessary, as this
could dangerously overload the system.
The manual controls of the remote control valve consist of:
l 1 � Control lever for remote valve lines
l 2 � Control lever for remote valve lines adjacent to fender (in the case of

3
4�way remote control valves) or central in the case of 6�way remote control
valves
l 3 � Control lever for remote valve lines adjacent to fender (in the case of
6�way remote control valves)

Tractors with a 2�way remote control valve are equipped with one lever.

4
Tractors with a 4�way remote control valve are equipped with two levers.
Tractors with a 6�way remote control valve are equipped with three levers.
Fig. 136

These control levers are located to the right of the driver and have three positions:
1. NEUTRAL

5
Move the lever into the MIDDLE POSITION to stop the flow of oil both delivered to the lift cylinder and returned from the lift
cylinder.
2. RAISE
Move the lever BACKWARDS to extend the cylinder and lift the implement.
3. LOWER
Move the lever FORWARDS to retract the cylinder and lower the implement. In the case of a double�acting control valve, the
implement lowering action is controlled hydraulically, while in the case of a single�acting valve the lowering action is deter-

6
mined by the weight of the implement that causes the oil to discharge from the cylinder
In the case of remote control valves with just one control lever, the lever is equipped with a DETENT and therefore will remain in the
position to which it is moved. In the case of remote control valves with two control levers, only lever (2) is equipped with a DETENT
and therefore will remain in the position to which it is moved. The other lever is fitted with a return spring and will return to the NEU-
TRAL position when released.

7
8
9
10

4-33

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 33 08/02/2013 21.10.43


USING THE TRACTOR
4.9.8 - Correspondence between the control levers and the rear hydraulic couplers
(AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX
1

60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E ->D10S653WT1E1001)


2
3
4

Fig. 137 - Correspondence between the control levers and the hydraulic couplers
5

l 1 � Control lever for the pair of service couplers 1


l 2 � Control lever for the pair of service couplers 2 (4�way remote control valves only)
l A � Remote control valve
l B � Left�hand rear hydraulic service couplers
l C � Right�hand rear hydraulic service couplers
l + � Oil flow direction with lever pulled back
� � Oil flow direction with lever pushed forward
6

The correspondence between the control levers and the hydraulic couplers can be identified by the numbers (from 1 to 2 in the case
of the 4�way remote control valve configuration) marked alongside the control lever.
7
8
9
10

4-34

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 34 08/02/2013 21.10.46


USING THE TRACTOR
4.9.9 - Correspondence between the control levers and the hydraulic service couplers
(AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001)

1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 138 - Correspondence between the control levers and the hydraulic service couplers
l 1 � Control lever for the pair of service couplers 1
l 2 � Control lever for the pair of service couplers 2 (4�way remote control valves only)
l 3 � Control lever for the pair of service couplers 3 (6�way remote control valves only)
l A � Remote control valve

6
l B � Left�hand rear hydraulic service couplers
l C � Right�hand rear hydraulic service couplers
l + � Oil flow direction with lever pulled back
l � � Oil flow direction with lever pushed forward
The correspondence between the control levers and the hydraulic couplers can be identified by the numbers (from 1 to 3 in the case
of the 6�way remote control valve configuration) marked alongside the control lever.

7
4.9.10 - Remote control valve operation
Double-acting remote control valve
Pulling the control lever back sends oil under pressure to the upper service coupler. The oil returning from the implement ram can
drain to tank through the lower service coupler
8
Conversely, if the control lever is pushed forward pressurised oil is delivered to the lower service coupler. The oil returning from the
implement cylinder can drain to tank through the upper service coupler.
Oil pressure to cylinder
l A � Pressurised oil delivery to cylinder � LIFTING
l B � Pressurised oil delivery to cylinder � LOWERING
9
10

Fig. 139

4-35

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 35 08/02/2013 21.10.53


USING THE TRACTOR
WARNING
Take maximum care when attaching and detaching implements.
1

Use sufficiently strong stands; avoid using cement blocks or bricks.


Do not allow anyone to come near the tractor.
2

Fig. 140

Example connection and operation of a double�acting cylinder


3

overturning of a reversible plough


Direction of oil flow with control lever in lifting position, symbol +.
4

Fig. 141
5
6
7

Fig. 142

In the case of diggers, shovels and loaders, moving the control lever to the float
position will allow the cylinder to move freely and thus the bucket to follow the
contours of the terrain.
8
9

Fig. 143
10

4-36

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 36 08/02/2013 21.10.56


USING THE TRACTOR
Converting a control valve from double�acting to single�acting
Turn the screw (1) located on the control valve approximately three turns clock-

1
wise to convert the control valve from a double�acting to a single�acting valve.
Reverse the process to restore it to a double�acting valve.

2
Fig. 144

3
Single-acting control valve
Pulling the control lever back sends oil under pressure to the upper service coupler
Moving the control lever forwards the oil returning from the cylinder on the imple-
ment can drain to tank.

4
5
Fig. 145

Example of connection to a single�acting cylinder


Trailer with hydraulic tipping
The cylinder pipe (1) must be connected to the service coupler of the control valve.
To raise the trailer, move the control lever back.

6
To lower the trailer, move the control lever forwards.

Fig. 146 7
IMPORTANT:
8
Float position may also be used to lower the tipping body of a trailer when the ram is operated as a single�acting cyl-
inder. In this case it is essential that the control valve is first converted to single�acting.

IMPORTANT:
On these tractors, the hydraulic circuit which supplies the auxiliary service control valve also supplies the lift. There-
fore it is not possible to operate the auxiliary service control valve and the lift simultaneously.
9
10

4-37

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 37 08/02/2013 21.11.01


USING THE TRACTOR
Connection of an implement to the hydraulic service couplers
IMPORTANT:
1

The hydraulic couplers have 1/2” female fittings that allow connec-
tion under pressure of the male fitting on the implement hose. The
couplers are also designed to disconnect automatically if acciden-
tally subjected to traction forces.
2

Fig. 147
3

IMPORTANT:
Check that connection hoses are of sufficient length to allow un-
impeded manoeuvring of the tractor and implement. To disconnect
the hose, return the distributor’s controls to neutral position to re-
lease any residual pressure from the system, then detach the fit-
4

tings and pull the hose off.

Fig. 148
5

DANGER
When connecting the hydraulic fittings of the implements to the tractor’s hydraulic couplers, carefully follow the instruc-
tions on the plates on the tractor or keep to the instructions given in this manual. Incorrect connections can invert the
implement lift and lowering directions, with serious risk of injury.
6

DANGER
DO NOT attempt to uncouple hydraulic connections or adjust implements with the engine running and the PTO rotat-
ing. To do so could result in very serious injury or death.

Hydraulic port protection


On completion of the work, carefully clean the connection fittings and the service
7

couplers.
8

Fig. 149
9

Note:
The hydraulic couplers must be kept clean and their protective caps must be fitted.

Note:
10

Take care not to mix different types of oil. Ensure the utmost cleanliness when making the hydraulic coupling between
the implement and tractor. Cover any couplers not in use with their protective caps.

4-38

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 38 08/02/2013 21.11.09


USING THE TRACTOR
IMPORTANT:
Before connecting implement hoses to the service couplers, stop the engine and check that the connection fittings

1
are clean. After having connected the hoses and started the engine, check that the hydraulic system is functioning
correctly. Then, after having operated the cylinders a few times to equalise the pressure (moving the control lever to
the lowering position, then to the raising position and then back to neutral), check the transmission oil level with the
cylinders both extended (raising) and retracted (lowering). The transmission oil should never be allowed to fall below
the minimum level (with cylinders extended) and should not ever greatly exceed the maximum level, as the same oil

2
supplies the transmission.
Operation of hydraulic devices that require a constant flow of oil
One example is use in combination with hydraulic motors

3
4
Fig. 150

These devices must be operated using a double�acting control valve controlled by the no. 3 lever equipped with a DETENT.
The connection must be made by connecting the pressure line to the corresponding service coupler marked with the number (1) of
the control valve, while the return line must be connected to the service coupler marked with the number (2).

5
To operate, push the control lever forward.
To stop the oil flow, first move the control lever to the DETENT position, until the motor has slowed down and come to a complete
stop.
Then move the control lever to the neutral position.

6
IMPORTANT
Do not move the control lever immediately to the neutral position, as the back pressure which would be generated
could damage the hoses if the motor is not equipped with safety valves.

Install an oil temperature sensor and, if necessary, an oil cooler.


The maximum permissible temperature is 110 °C (230 °F).

7
8
9
10

4-39

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 39 08/02/2013 21.11.12


USING THE TRACTOR
4.10 - TOWING DEVICES
4.10.1 - Towing devices
1

CAUTION
All the implements mounted on the tractor must be secured firmly and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions; see attachment holes diagram. Use permitted devices only.

CAUTION
2

The front towing hitch should be used for emergency trailer towing or for towing the tractor in the yard or in an autho-
rised service centre.

CAUTION
In Italy only Cuna type towing hitches and the drawbar may be used.
3

CAUTION
When transporting heavy loads (exceeding the weight of the tractor) keep the speed below 15 km/h.
4

WARNING
Never tow semi�mounted implements, trailers or agricultural machines by attaching them to the top link of the three�
point linkage. This could cause the tractor to rear up or overturn backwards.

CAUTION
5

The maximum permissible hitch load (horizontal and vertical), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use and
the maximum trailed load for trailers without brakes, for trailers with mechanical brakes, for trailers with inertia braking
and with hydraulic or air brakes are indicated in the tractor registration document (only issued for the Italian market).
Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct responsibility of the user.
6

WARNING
The loads given in the tables below refer to the technical or category limits of the hitches.

IMPORTANT:
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single�axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
7

trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document. Any
problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits shall be the responsibility of the user.
The tractor can be equipped with the following rear towing devices:
l Category “A” drawbar
l Category “C” towing hitch
8

l Class “C” towing hitch with fast height adjustment


l EEC automatic towing hitch
l “EEC” towing hitch
l Category II drawbar
The tractor can be equipped with the following front towing devices:
9

l Towing hitch
10

4-40

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 40 08/02/2013 21.11.18


USING THE TRACTOR
4.10.2 - Category “A” drawbar”
WARNING

1
Do not allow anyone to ride on the drawbar or on the lower links when the tractor is in motion.

Swinging drawbar of the type commonly used for towing agricultural implements and for trailers with more than one axle and
and conse�
conse-
quently with low vertical load.

2
To facilitate trailer attachment, the drawbar consists of a horizontally adjustable swinging bar.
The bar can also be inverted to adjust the height from the ground.
Fixing to the tractor under the gearbox is usually by way of the hole (1) (one of the
two holes on the end of the drawbar).
Alternatively, by using the other hole, the drawbar can be lengthened by 5 cm.

3
To adjust the horizontal position of the bar, remove pins (2), move the bar to the
required position, then replace the pins.

4
Fig. 151

4.10.3 - Class “C” towing hitch


The towing hitch is used for towing agricultural implements or road�going trailers with one or more axles.

5
IMPORTANT:
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single�axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document. Any
problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits shall be the responsibility of the user.
The class “C” towing hitch is fixed to the support brackets (1) by two lock pins (2).

6
It can be positioned at the desired height by removing the positioning pins (3) and
re�inserting them in the required position.

7
Fig. 152
8

4.10.4 - Class “C” towing hitch with rapid height adjustment


The towing hitch is used for towing agricultural implements or road�going trailers with one or more axles.
IMPORTANT:
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single�axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document. Any
9

problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits shall be the responsibility of the user.
The class “C” towing hitch with rapid adjustment allows for extremely easy height adjustment.
10

4-41

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 41 08/02/2013 21.11.23


USING THE TRACTOR
To adjust the height of the hitch, proceed as follows:
l Grip the hitch using the handle (1).
1

l Pull the retaining pin (2) upwards to disengage the pins from the guides.
l Adjust the hitch to the desired height and release the retaining pin (2) to
enable the pins to re�enter the locking holes.
2

Fig. 153

4.10.5 - “EEC” towing hitch


3

The towing hitch is used for towing agricultural implements or road�going trailers with one or more axles.
IMPORTANT:
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single�axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document. Any
problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits shall be the responsibility of the user.
4

The EEC towing hitch is available in two versions:


l with 32 mm diameter lock pin hole
l with 38 mm diameter lock pin hole
Towing hitch height adjustment
The towing hitch is equipped with a height adjustment device.
5

To adjust the height of the hitch, proceed as follows:


l Grip the hitch.
l Pull lever (1) to the right to disengage the pins from the guides.
l Adjust the hitch to the desired height and release lever (1) to enable the
pins to re�enter the locking holes.
6

Fig. 154
7

Towing hitch coupling and release


Coupling
CAUTION:
Risk of crushing injuries to limbs
8

Raise lever (1), pushing upwards until it locks into place.


Coupling pin (2) lifts, coupling lever (3) moves to the new position (turned up-
wards).
9
10

Fig. 155

4-42

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 42 08/02/2013 21.11.28


USING THE TRACTOR
Reverse the tractor slowly, the drawbar eye must enter fully into the hitch, unlock
lever (1) and lower lever (2). Coupling pin (3) descends and locks the drawbar eye

1
in place. At the same time, safety pin (4) re�enters its seat.

2
Fig. 156

IMPORTANT:

3
Check that the hitch is successfully attached; make sure that the release lever is lowered to enable the coupling pin
to lock securely.

IMPORTANT:
If the hitch is not perfectly fastened, try moving the tractor or trailer forwards and backwards approximately 50 cm
so that the eye can locate in the correct position and the hitch can therefore fasten securely; alternatively, adjust the

4
coupling lever.
Release
IMPORTANT:
Ensure that the trailer brake is applied.

5
Raise release lever (1) until it locks into place

6
7
Fig. 157

IMPORTANT:
Do not use levers or extensions to lengthen the arm of the release lever. If the release lever is difficult to operate, move
the tractor or trailer slightly in order to relieve pressure exerted by the drawbar eye on the coupling pin.
8

Drive the tractor forward until the drawbar eye is clear of the hitch.
9
10

4-43

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 43 08/02/2013 21.11.47


USING THE TRACTOR
For reasons of safety, it is advisable to keep the towing hitch locked shut at all
times; to do this, turn coupling lever (1) in the appropriate direction as shown in
1

the figure.
2

Fig. 158

4.10.6 - “EEC” automatic towing hitch


3

The towing hitch is used for towing agricultural implements or road�going trailers with one or more axles.
IMPORTANT:
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single�axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document. Any
problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits shall be the responsibility of the user.
4

The EEC towing hitch is available in the version:


l with 38 mm diameter lock pin hole
Towing hitch height adjustment
The towing hitch is equipped with a height adjustment device.
5

To adjust the height of the hitch, proceed as follows:


l Grip the hitch.
l Pull lever (1) to the right to disengage the pins from the guides.
l Adjust the hitch to the desired height and release lever (1) to allow the pins
to re�enter the locking holes.
6

Fig. 159

Towing hitch coupling and release


7

Coupling
CAUTION:
Risk of crushing injuries to limbs
8

Raise lever (1), pushing upwards until it locks into place.


Coupling pin (2) lifts, snap lever (3) can be seen at the back of the hitch cavity and
coupling lever (4) moves to the new position (upturned).
9
10

Fig. 160

4-44

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 44 08/02/2013 21.11.59


USING THE TRACTOR
Reverse the tractor slowly until the drawbar eye fully enters into the hitch, operat-
ing snap lever (3). This striking action causes coupling pin (2) to drop and safety

1
pin (5) to automatically slot into place.

2
Fig. 161

IMPORTANT:

3
Check that the hitch is successfully attached; make sure that the release lever is lowered to enable the coupling pin
to lock securely.

IMPORTANT:
If the hitch is not perfectly fastened, try moving the tractor or trailer forwards and backwards approximately 50 cm
so that the eye can locate in the correct position and the hitch can therefore fasten securely; alternatively, adjust the

4
coupling lever.
Release
IMPORTANT:
Ensure that the trailer brake is applied.

5
Raise release lever (1) until it locks into place.

6
7
Fig. 162

IMPORTANT:
Do not use levers or extensions to lengthen the arm of the release lever. If the release lever is difficult to operate, move
the tractor or trailer slightly in order to relieve pressure exerted by the drawbar eye on the coupling pin.
8

Drive the tractor forward until the drawbar eye is clear of the hitch.
9
10

4-45

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 45 08/02/2013 21.12.12


USING THE TRACTOR
For reasons of safety, it is advisable to keep the towing hitch locked shut at all
times; to do this, turn coupling lever (1) in the appropriate direction as shown in
1

the figure.
2

Fig. 163

4.10.7 - Category II drilled drawbar


3

WARNING
Do not allow anyone to ride on the drawbar or on the lower links when the tractor is in motion.

The category II drawbar is attached to the lower links and can be useful in certain applications using specific equipment.
4

The drawbar is fixed to the tractor as follows:


l apply ball joints (1) to drawbar (2);
l insert lock pins (3) in the drawbar and secure them with the cotters;
l attach the drawbar to the lower links.
5

Fig. 164
6

4.10.8 - Front towing hitch


CAUTION
The front towing hitch should be used for emergency trailer towing or for towing the tractor in the yard or in an autho-
rised service centre.
7

Use only original pins (1).


During use, always check that the safety cotter (2) is securely locked into place
8
9

Fig. 165
10

4-46

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 46 08/02/2013 21.12.24


1
2
3
4
5
5 - STORING THE TRACTOR

6
7
8
9
10

5-1

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 1 08/02/2013 21.12.29


STORING THE TRACTOR
5.1 - OPERATIONS PRIOR TO LONG TERM GARAGING
For example: at the start of winter
1

If the tractor is not to be used for a long period, we recommend that you carry out the following operations to prevent cer-
tain essential components from deteriorating during storage.
l Run the engine until warm, then stop and drain all the oil from the engine and change the filters. Fill with new oil of the speci-
fied type.
l Top up the cooling system radiator with the prescribed coolant with anti�freeze and anti�corrosion properties.
2

l Fill the fuel tank completely to prevent condensation forming inside the tank.
l Switch on the engine and check that the fuel and injection systems are functioning correctly.
l Check that the diesel fuel filters are clean.
l Loosen the fuel cap and radiator cap slightly so that the relative seals are not compressed.
l Clean the air cleaner filter element. Lubricate the combine harvester as specified in the maintenance schedule.
l Remove the battery from the combine and clean the two terminals (positive/negative).
l The battery should be charged and then stored in a cool, dry place.
3

l Cover the exhaust pipe with a plastic bag secured with adhesive tape. The combine harvester must be perfectly clean; Touch
up any chipped paintwork to prevent rust.
l Coat bare metal surfaces with grease to prevent rust from forming.
IMPORTANT:
The tractor must be stored in a suitable garage and should not be exposed to excessive dust. If the tractor has to be
4

stored outdoors, cover it with a sheet.


5
6
7
8
9
10

5-2

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 2 08/02/2013 21.12.31


STORING THE TRACTOR
5.2 - PREPARING THE TRACTOR FOR USE AFTER A LONG PERIOD OF INACTIV-
ITY

1
l Remove the tractor from the wheel stands (if used).
l Remove the cover sheet (if any).
l Remove the cover from the exhaust.
l Charge and refit the battery (follow the safety instructions given in this manual).
l Start the engine and allow it run at low rpm for a few minutes.
l Do not accelerate until you are sure the engine is running smoothly.

2
l Carry out all the operations prescribed in this manual for the start of the working season; the tractor will then be ready to be
put back into service.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

5-3

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 3 08/02/2013 21.12.31


STORING THE TRACTOR
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK


6
7
8
9
10

5-4

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 4 08/02/2013 21.12.31


1
2
3
4
5
6 - MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS

6
7
8
9
10

6-1

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 1 08/02/2013 21.12.31


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.1 - MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
This section of the manual deals with the lubrication and general maintenance of the tractor. If you have any doubts concerning lu�
concerning lu-
1

brication and maintenance, consult your dealer. Details on the frequency of maintenance operations, the quality and volume of fluids
and lubricants can be found in the “Fluids/Lubricants and fill volumes” table.
Before carrying out maintenance work of any type, observe the following safety instructions:
l Remove the key from the starter switch;
l Hang a “DO NOT START ENGINE“ warning sign from the steering wheel;
2

l If necessary, place warning signs also around the tractor.


WARNING
For all maintenance operations to be carried out at a height greater than 1500 mm use a suitable platform so that the
work can be performed in safety.
3

WARNING
Some of the illustrations in this manual show the tractor with panels or guards and panels removed for the sake of clar-
ity. Do not use the tractor unless these guards and panels are fitted correctly. If it is essential to remove these guards
or panels in order to repair the tractor, they MUST be refitted before starting the tractor.
DANGER
4

Never start the engine by shorting across the terminals of the starter motor as the tractor could suddenly move off, with
a consequent risk of injury to the operator.

CAUTION
Always wear proper work clothes; wear earplugs and eye protection whenever necessary.
5

WARNING
Read the safety instructions provided at the start of this manual to ensure the safety of the user.
6

WARNING
In certain climatic conditions and in areas with tree cover, grass or agricultural planting, operation of an internal com-
bustion engine can constitute a fire hazard. Note that this tractor is not fitted with anti�spark devices on its exhaust
pipe.
7

CAUTION
Maintenance operations must be carried out at the prescribed intervals in order to maintain the tractor in good working
condition. Lack of routine servicing can lead to unnecessary breakdowns and can reduce the vehicle’s service life.

DANGER
Start the engine with the key only when seated in the driver’s position. Do not attempt to start the engine by shorting
8

across the starter motor terminals. The tractor may start moving if the gear lever or clutch safety circuits are bypassed.
This could cause serious injury or death of persons in the vicinity of the tractor. Make sure that the cover is always
fitted over the starter motor solenoid.
CAUTION
9

Before starting the tractor ensure that it is able to operate safely also on public highways.

WARNING
Before starting the engine, make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated. DO NOT run the engine in an enclosed area.
10

Exhaust gases can cause asphyxia.

6-2

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 2 08/02/2013 21.12.41


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.1.1 - Maintenance intervals
The recommended maintenance intervals apply to normal operating conditions.

1
If the tractor is subjected to extremely heavy�duty work or used in dusty environments, the frequency of scheduled maintenance
should be increased.
Thoroughly observe the recommended maintenance intervals and use exclusively recommended lubricants and fluids.
6.1.2 - Washing the tractor/attached implements

2
WARNING
Wait for all parts to cool down before cleaning the tractor.

IMPORTANT:
Do not direct the water jet from a pressure washer towards the radiator/coolers, bearings or electronic/electrical com-

3
ponents.

IMPORTANT:
Follow all the instructions in the manual for the attached implements before starting cleaning.

4
For general cleaning of the tractor, pressure washers may be used providing the following instructions are observed:
l hold the lance so the nozzle is at least 80 cm away from the tractor ;
l use a jet angle between 45° and 90°;
l maximum pressure 30 bar;
l maximum temperature 50° C.

5
6
7
8
9
10

6-3

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 3 08/02/2013 21.12.44


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.2 - FLUIDS / LUBRICANTS AND FILL VOLUMES
CAUTION
1

Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Using any lubricants other those recommended can result in serious damage to the tractor.
Failure to have the tractor serviced at the recommended maintenance intervals and to use the prescribed lubricants will invalidate
2

the manufacturer’s warranty.


Warnings:
l Ensure that any containers used to store lubricants are perfectly clean. Funnels and measuring cups must be covered to
prevent dust settling on them.
l Clean the areas next to the parts to be lubricated.
Grease parts when warm so that the grease flows more easily.
3

l
l Clean all plugs and caps before refitting them.
l Carry out all operations in accordance with the instructions given and the applicable safety regulations.
l Carry out maintenance only with the engine switched off, the ignition key removed and the parking brake applied.
l Only work with the engine running when this is specifically indicated in the instructions.
l For fuel tank capacity refer to the “Technical Data” chapter
The table shows the lubricants and fill volumes (in litres) for tractors in this range.
4

Table 5 - Technical data


AGROLUX 45 E AGROLUX 50 E AGROLUX 60 E AGROLUX 70 E
->D10S403WX1E5001 ->D10S453WT1E1001 ->D10S553WT1E1001 ->D10S653WT1E1001

B0 - ENGINE
5

Engine oil: DF Super EN- 6,7* 6,7* 6,7* 6,7*


GINE OIL 15W�40 (ACEA
E5,E3; API CH�4/CG�4/
CF�4/CF; Deutz DQC 2�05)
Antifreeze liquid: DF 11 11 11 11
FREEZE (ready for use)
6

D0 - TRANSMISSION
Gearbox oil: DF UTTO (API 35 35 35 35
GL 4, JDM�20C, M1143, ZF
TE�ML03E, 05F)
F0 - FRONT AXLE
7

Front axle oil: DF UTTO 6 6 6


(API GL 4, JDM�20C,
M1143, ZF TE�ML03E,
05F)
Oil for final drive units: DF 1,5x2 1,5x2 1,5x2
UTTO (API GL 4, JDM�20C,
8

M1143, ZF TE�ML03E,
05F)
E0 - REAR AXLE
Brake fluid: SDF BRAKE X X X X
OIL (MB 236.6; ZF TE�ML
9

03D-04D-09A-11A-14A-
17C;)
A0 - GREASING POINTS
Grease: DF GREASE X X X X
EP2 X
10

6-4

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 4 08/02/2013 21.12.44


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001

1
B0 - ENGINE
Engine oil: DF Super ENGINE OIL 15W�40 (ACEA E5,E3; API CH�4/ 6,7*
CG�4/CF�4/CF; Deutz DQC 2�05)
Antifreeze liquid: DF FREEZE (ready for use) 11
D0 - TRANSMISSION

2
Gearbox oil: DF UTTO (API GL 4, JDM�20C, M1143, ZF TE�ML03E, 35
05F)
F0 - FRONT AXLE
Front axle oil: DF UTTO (API GL 4, JDM�20C, M1143, ZF TE�ML03E, 6
05F)
Oil for final drive units: DF UTTO (API GL 4, JDM�20C, M1143, ZF TE� 1,5x2

3
ML03E, 05F)
E0 - REAR AXLE
Brake fluid: SDF BRAKE OIL (MB 236.6; ZF TE�ML 03D�04D�09A�11A� X
14A�17C;)

4
A0 - GREASING POINTS
Grease: DF GREASE EP2 X X
(*) With filter + 1 litre
(**) Version without brakes (Version with brakes)
[1] � Minimum specifications for engine oil

5
[2] – Recommended specifications for engine oil
For dilution percentages, characteristics, specifications and safety warnings regarding use of the antifreeze, see the instructions on
page:
See para. 10.1.4 - Coolant - page 10-9
CAUTION

6
To avoid this type of problem, do not change from mineral oil [1] to synthetic oil [2].

7
8
9
10

6-5

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 5 08/02/2013 21.12.46


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.3 - SERVICE INTERVALS
The recommended servicing intervals are given below.
1

IMPORTANT
The service number corresponds to that indicated in the service and warranty booklet.

IMPORTANT
2

For the operations to be carried out, refer to the Maintenance and Inspection Schedule.

Table 6
SERVICE INTERVAL (HOURS) OPERATIONS TO BE CARRIED OUT
3

1° 100 Carry out the operations indicated for every 100 hours
2° 300 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50 and 300 hours
3° 600 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 300 and 600 hours
4° 900 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50 and 300 hours
5° 1200 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 300, 600 and 1200 hours
6° 1500 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50 and 300 hours
7° 1800 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 300 and 600 hours
4

8° 2100 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50 and 300 hours
9° 2400 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 300, 600 and 1200 hours
10° 2700 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50 and 300 hours
5
6
7
8
9
10

6-6

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 6 08/02/2013 21.12.49


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.4 - MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION SCHEDULE (AGROLUX 45 E
->D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E

1
->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E ->D10S653WT1E1001)
Table 7
FRE- ITEMS REQUIRING MAINTENANCE ACTION REFER-
QUENCY IN GREASE DRAIN CHECK CLEAN RENEW ENCE
HOURS WATER

2
every 10 General tractor inspection (Note 1) 6-12
Engine oil level X 6-12
Coolant X 6-13
Fuel level X 6-13
Lights X 6-16
ROPS X 6-17
Seat belt X 6-17

3
every 50 Transmission oil level X 6-18
Grease the rear axle X 6-18
Greasing the pivot system of the 2WD X 6-19
front axle
Greasing the 4WD front axle X 6-20
Brake reservoir oil level X 6-21

4
Battery X 6-21
Grease the 3�point linkage X 6-22
Wheels and tyres X 6-22
at 100 (1st First carry out the operations indicated at intervals of 50 hours
service) Braking distance X 6-23
Check tension of drive belts X 6-23
Engine oil (Note 2)

5
X 6-24
Renew the engine oil filter cartridge X 6-25
(Note 4)
Cooler X 6-26
Fuel filter X 6-27
Transmission oil filter X 6-30
Parking brake lever X 6-33

6
Oil pipe � Hydrostatic steering X 6-33
every 300 First carry out the operations indicated at intervals of 50 hours
Braking distance X 6-23
Cooler X 6-26
Parking brake lever X 6-33
Engine oil (Note 2)(Note 6) X 6-24
Engine oil filter cartridge (Note 4)

7
X 6-25
(Note 6)
Front axle/final drives oil level X 6-34
Mechanical clutch control X 6-34
Oil pipes � Hydrostatic steering X 6-33
every 600 First carry out the operations indicated for every 50 hours and every 300 hours
Engine drivebelt tension X 6-23
8

Engine valve clearances and fuel in- X 6-36


jectors
Fuel filter X 6-27
Transmission oil filter (Note 5) X 6-30
Differential lock system X 6-36
Front wheel hub bearings (2WD) X 6-36
9

Braking system with Safety Brakes X 6-36


valve
every 1200 First, carry out the operations indicated at intervals of 50 hours, 300 hours and 600 hours
hours or at Fuel injection pump X 6-38
least once a Air cleaner element and safety ele- X 6-38
ment (Note 3)
10

year
Bleeding air and water from the filters X 6-45
and fuel system (Note 3)
Starter motor X 6-48

6-7

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 7 08/02/2013 21.12.51


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
FRE- ITEMS REQUIRING MAINTENANCE ACTION REFER-
QUENCY IN GREASE DRAIN CHECK CLEAN RENEW ENCE
1

HOURS WATER
every 1200 Coolant and flushing the circuit (Note X 6-49
hours or at 2)
least once Transmission oil (Note 2) X 6-51
every 2 Front axle/final drives oil level (Note 2) X 6-55
Changing the steering box oil (Note 2) X 6-56
years
Clean engine air cleaner (Note 3)
2

General X 6-38
mainte- Front and rear hydraulic brakes circuit X 6-58
nance
NOTE 1 � Check for leaks, flexible hoses in contact with other parts, loose threaded fasteners and build�up of debris.
Before use, rectify leaks, ensure hoses are secured and tighten loose bolts.
NOTE 2 � For the correct product type, see the table “Fluids/lubricants and fill volumes”.
3

NOTE 3 � When the warning light is illuminated.


NOTE 4 � Whenever the oil is changed.
NOTE 5 - At least once a year
NOTE 6 � Service intervals should be halved if the diesel fuel used contains over 0.5% sulphur
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

6-8

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 8 08/02/2013 21.12.51


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.5 - MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION SCHEDULE (AGROLUX 4.80 E
->D10S714WT1E10001)

1
Table 8
FRE- ITEMS REQUIRING MAINTENANCE ACTION REFER-
QUENCY IN GREASE DRAIN CHECK CLEAN RENEW ENCE
HOURS WATER
every 10 General tractor inspection (Note 1) 6-12
Engine oil level

2
X 6-12
Coolant X 6-13
Fuel level X 6-14
Lights X 6-16
ROPS X 6-17
Seat belt X 6-17
every 50 Transmission oil level X 6-18

3
Grease the rear axle X 6-18
Greasing the pivot system of the 2WD X 6-19
front axle
Greasing the 4WD front axle X 6-20
Brake reservoir oil level X 6-21
Battery X 6-21
Grease the 3�point linkage

4
X 6-22
Wheels and tyres X 6-22
at 100 (1st First carry out the operations indicated at intervals of 50 hours
service) Braking distance X 6-23
Check tension of drive belts X 6-23
Engine oil (Note 2) X 6-24
Renew the engine oil filter cartridge X 6-25

5
(Note 4)
Cooler X 6-27
Fuel filter X 6-29
Transmission oil filter X 6-31
Parking brake lever X 6-33
Oil pipe � Hydrostatic steering X 6-33

6
every 300 First carry out the operations indicated at intervals of 50 hours
Braking distance X 6-23
Cooler X 6-27
Parking brake lever X 6-33
Engine oil (Note 2)(Note 6) X 6-24
Engine oil filter cartridge (Note 4) X 6-25
(Note 6)

7
Front axle/final drives oil level X 6-34
Mechanical clutch control X 6-34
Oil pipes � Hydrostatic steering X 6-33
every 600 First carry out the operations indicated for every 50 hours and every 300 hours
Engine drivebelt tension X 6-23
Engine valve clearances and fuel in- X 6-36
8
jectors
Fuel filter X 6-29
Transmission oil filter (Note 5) X 6-31
Differential lock system X 6-36
Front wheel hub bearings (2WD) X 6-36
Braking system with Safety Brakes X 6-36
valve
9

every 1200 First, carry out the operations indicated at intervals of 50 hours, 300 hours and 600 hours
hours or at Fuel injection pump X 6-38
least once a Air cleaner element and safety ele- X 6-42
year ment (Note 3)
Bleeding air and water from the filters X 6-47
10

and fuel system (Note 3)


Starter motor X 6-48

6-9

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 9 08/02/2013 21.12.52


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
FRE- ITEMS REQUIRING MAINTENANCE ACTION REFER-
QUENCY IN GREASE DRAIN CHECK CLEAN RENEW ENCE
1

HOURS WATER
every 1200 Coolant and flushing the circuit (Note X 6-50
hours or at 2)
least once Transmission oil (Note 2) X 6-53
every 2 Front axle/final drives oil level (Note 2) X 6-55
years
Clean engine air cleaner (Note 3)
2

General X 6-42
mainte- Front and rear hydraulic brakes circuit X 6-58
nance
NOTE 1 � Check for leaks, flexible hoses in contact with other parts, loose threaded fasteners and build�up of debris.
Before use, rectify leaks, ensure hoses are secured and tighten loose bolts.
NOTE 2 � For the correct product type, see the table “Fluids/lubricants and fill volumes”.
3

NOTE 3 � When the warning light is illuminated.


NOTE 4 � Whenever the oil is changed.
NOTE 5 - At least once a year
NOTE 6 � Service intervals should be halved if the diesel fuel used contains over 0.5% sulphur
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

6-10

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 10 08/02/2013 21.12.52


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.6 - ACCESSING THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
6.6.1 - Accessing the engine compartment

1
Raising the hood
Press the button (1) located under the front grille to release the hood catch.
Raise the hood, which will open to its full extent.
To close the hood, push it down until you feel the catch engage.

2
3
Fig. 166

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

6-11

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 11 08/02/2013 21.12.52


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.7 - DAILY INTERVENTION
6.7.1 - General inspection of the tractor
1

WARNING
Wait for the engine to cool down before touching it. During maintenance operations, apply the parking brake and
chock the wheels. On completion of the work, replace the side panels, the hood and any safety guards or covers that
were removed.
2

Before starting work, inspect the tractor exterior for signs of oil leaks or other faults.
Clean all mud, straw, leaves, etc.. from the tractor.
If necessary, contact your dealer to repair any faults once you have located the source of the problem.
6.7.2 - Checking the engine oil level
WARNING
3

Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.

WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.
4

DANGER
Risk of burns when the engine is hot; wait for the engine to cool down before carrying out maintenance, inspections
or adjustments.
5

Note:
Always park the tractor on a level surface when changing the oil or checking the oil level.

Before checking the engine oil level, run the engine for a few minutes, switch off the engine and after approximately a minute check
6

the oil level.


To check the oil level, pull out the dipstick (1), wipe it with a lint free cloth, re�insert
it and pull it out once more to check the oil level.
If the level lies between the two notches (2) and (3) on the dipstick, it is correct.
7
8

Fig. 167

When necessary, top up with oil of the specified quality through the filler (1) to the
top notch on the dipstick.
9
10

Fig. 168

6-12

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 12 08/02/2013 21.12.52


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.7.3 - Checking the coolant level (AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX
50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E

1
->D10S653WT1E1001)
CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

2
Open the hood.
Check the level of coolant in expansion tank (1).

If the coolant level is low:


1. Wait until the engine is cold.
2. Top up the level with the same type of fluid as that already contained in the

3
tank by pouring it in through the filler hole after removing cap (2).

4
Fig. 169

6.7.4 - Checking the coolant level (AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001)


CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be

5
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Open the hood.


Check the level of coolant in expansion tank (1).

If the coolant level is low:

6
1. Wait until the engine is cold.
2. Top up the level with the same type of fluid as that already contained in the
tank by pouring it in through the filler hole after removing cap (2).

Fig. 170
7
6.7.5 - Checking the fuel level (AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX
50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
8

->D10S653WT1E1001)
Always check that there is sufficient fuel in the tank, which should never be allowed to run dry.
Use exclusively diesel fuel of a recognised make with sulphur content of less than 0.5%.
If this value is exceeded, the time intervals for oil changes, indicated in the maintenance tables, must be halved.
9

CAUTION
Observe safety regulations when storing fuel in tanks.

DANGER
10

Take care not to cause dangerous sparks when working nearby stores of diesel or flammable materials.

6-13

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 13 08/02/2013 21.12.53


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Filling up with fuel at the end of the day’s work
CAUTION
1

When refuelling, switch off the engine and always clean up any diesel spilled on the tractor.

CAUTION
Never continue to run the engine until the fuel tank is completely empty. If the engine stops because the tractor runs
2

of fuel, it will then be necessary to bleed the air from the fuel injection system.

WARNING
Never fill the diesel tank when there are naked flames or in closed premises. Do not smoke while refuelling and always
switch off the engine beforehand.
3

The fuel tank should always be filled at the end of the working day to prevent con-
densation forming during the night.
4
5

Fig. 171

Fuel tank drain cap


CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.
6

The fuel tank is fitted with a drain plug (1) located at the front.
IMPORTANT
The fuel will drain more quickly if the filler cap is opened.
7
8

Fig. 172

6.7.6 - Checking the fuel level (AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001)


Always check that there is sufficient fuel in the tank, which should never be allowed to run dry.
Use exclusively diesel fuel of a recognised make with sulphur content of less than 0.5.
9

If this value is exceeded, the time intervals for oil changes, indicated in the maintenance tables, must be halved.
CAUTION
Observe safety regulations when storing fuel in tanks.
10

6-14

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 14 08/02/2013 21.12.54


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
DANGER
Take care not to cause dangerous sparks when working nearby stores of diesel or flammable materials.

1
Filling up with fuel at the end of the day’s work
CAUTION
When refuelling, switch off the engine and always clean up any diesel spilled on the tractor.

2
CAUTION
Never continue to run the engine until the fuel tank is completely empty. If the engine stops because the tractor runs
of fuel, it will then be necessary to bleed the air from the fuel injection system.

3
WARNING
Never fill the diesel tank when there are naked flames or in closed premises. Do not smoke while refuelling and always
switch off the engine beforehand.

The fuel tank should always be filled at the end of the working day to prevent con-

4
densation forming during the night.

5
Fig. 172

6
Drain plug
CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

7
The fuel tank is fitted with a drain plug (1) located at the front.
IMPORTANT
The fuel will drain more quickly if the filler cap is opened. 8

Fig. 173
9
10

6-15

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 15 08/02/2013 21.12.54


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Draining water from the fuel pre-filter
Always drain the water from the fuel pre�filter before returning the tractor to service
1

after the winter season.


Proceed as follows:
l Place a suitable receptacle under the filter (1).
l Loosen screw (3) and wait until all the water has drained from bowl (2).
l Retighten screw (3).
2

Fig. 174
3

Draining water from the fuel filter


The tractor is fitted with a fuel filter if equipped with the water drain valve (2).
Drain water from fuel filter (1) by opening valve (2) located at the bottom of the the
filter bowl to allow the fuel mixed with water to flow out; close the valve as soon as
the fuel emerges free of water.
4
5

Fig. 175

Fuel lift pump


WARNING
6

If fuel or oil under pressure hits the skin or eyes, it can cause serious injury, blindness or even death. High�pressure
fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks; never use your hands. Wear
safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from medical personnel
with experience of this particular problem.
The fuel lift pump is installed on the right-hand side of the engine at the front
7

The pump is operated manually by pressing firmly on the top, as shown by the
arrow.
8

Fig. 176
9

6.7.7 - Check the electrical system


Check that the headlights, direction indicators, sidelights, etc., all function correctly.
10

6-16

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 16 08/02/2013 21.12.55


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.7.8 - Checking the protective structure and seat belt
Before starting the day’s work perform an external visual inspection of the ROPS and the seat belt to ensure there are no alterations

1
caused by wear, deformations or impact damage.
If any alterations are found the functionality of the ROPS or the seat belt would be impaired; in this case, contact your Dealer to have
replacements fitted.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

6-17

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 17 08/02/2013 21.12.55


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.8 - MAINTENANCE EVERY 50 HOURS
6.8.1 - Checking the transmission oil level
1

DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause severe burns.

WARNING
2

Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.

To check the oil level correctly, put the tractor into the following condition:
l Park the tractor on level ground.
3

l The engine must be switched off at least 5 minutes beforehand and the parking brake must be applied.
l The rear lift must be lowered.
l The remote valve control levers must be in the neutral position.
Unscrew plug (1) and check that the oil is level with the lower edge of the hole.
4
5

Fig. 177

If it is necessary to top up the oil level, proceed as follows:


If necessary, top up with the oil indicated in the Lubricants table in the prescribed quantities until the level reaches the lower
6

edge of the hole, then replace and tighten the plug.


l Restart the engine and leave it idling for a few minutes, then switch off the engine and check the oil level again.

1. Transmission oil filler plug (with integral breather).


7
8

Fig. 178
9
10

6-18

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 18 08/02/2013 21.12.56


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.8.2 - Grease the rear axle
Grease the halfshaft bearings (one per side, as shown in the figure).

1
Inject grease through the nipples using a grease pump.

2
Fig. 179

3
6.8.3 - Greasing the pivot system of the 2WD front axle
Greasing the axle pivot bushings
Inject grease through the nipples using a grease pump.

4
5
Fig. 180

Greasing the steering spindles


Inject grease through the nipples using a grease pump.

6
7
Fig. 181
8
Greasing the steering cylinder
Use a grease gun to inject grease through the grease nipple on the steering cyl-
inder pivot pin.
9
10

Fig. 182

6-19

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 19 08/02/2013 21.12.56


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.8.4 - Grease the 4WD front axle
Greasing the steering cylinder
1

Inject grease through the two grease nipples on the cylinder using a grease pump.
The grease nipples are located on the steering cylinder pivot pins.
2
3

Fig. 183

Greasing the steering knuckle bearings


Inject grease through the two grease nipples on the right and left hand side, using
a grease pump.
4
5

Fig. 184

The grease nipples are located on the kingpins.


6
7

Fig. 185

Greasing the front pivot bracket of the front axle


8

Inject grease through the grease nipple, using a grease pump.


9
10

Fig. 186

6-20

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 20 08/02/2013 21.13.03


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.8.5 - Checking brake reservoir oil level
Checking brake reservoir oil level

1
WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High�
pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.

2
Note:
Always park the tractor on a level surface when changing the oil or checking the oil level.

WARNING

3
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

The hydrostatic brake control system obviates need to adjust the positions of the brake pedals.
To check the level:

4
l Park the tractor on level ground.
l Check the oil level through the sightglass (2) on the reservoir; if necessary,
remove the filler cap (1) and top up with the oil specified in the Lubricants
and fluids table.

5
Fig. 187

6
6.8.6 - Check the battery
WARNING
The terminals and some components of the battery contain lead or lead compounds. In some countries the legislation
considers these substances as a cause of cancer, birth defects and damage to the reproductive system. Wash your
hands after handling the battery.

7
WARNING
Wear safety goggles when charging or topping up the battery.

WARNING
8

Only use 12 volt chargers to charge the battery.

DANGER
The gases given off by the battery are highly explosive. Never cause a spark or allow a naked flame near the battery.
9

Batteries must be stored and charged in a well�ventilated environment. Take care that the acid electrolyte does not
come into contact with your skin or clothes.
CAUTION
Always disconnect the battery before carrying out any work on the electrical system. Always disconnect the battery
10

and all the electronic control units before carrying out any welding on the tractor or any of the equipment connected
to the tractor.

6-21

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 21 08/02/2013 21.13.07


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
The battery does not require special maintenance.
Check that the battery acid level is between the MIN and MAX marks.
1

At the start of the winter season, check the battery charge level. Re�charge if
necessary.
2

Fig. 188

6.8.7 - Greasing the rear 3-point linkage


3

IMPORTANT:
When adjusting the length of the top link of the 3�point hitch, ensure it does not come apart and that a sufficient length
of the threaded end of the turnbuckle is screwed into the turnbuckle housing to withstand the tractive force applied
when working.
As stated in the maintenance table, it is necessary to grease the two lift unit tie
4

rods (1), one on either side.


Inject grease through the nipples using a grease pump.
5

Fig. 189
6

As stated in the maintenance table, it is necessary to grease the two tie rods of the
side stabilizers (2), one on either side.
Inject grease through the nipples using a grease pump.
7

Fig. 190
8

6.8.8 - Checking wheels and tyres


WARNING
For wheel changing operations and certain maintenance and repair work, the tractor must be raised from the ground
on specific safety stands.
9

Periodically check the condition of the tyres. Change them if necessary. The tyres should be inflated to the pressure specified by the
manufacturer in accordance with the conditions of use.
When fixing the wheels, observe the recommended tightening torques.
10

6-22

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 22 08/02/2013 21.13.20


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.9 - MAINTENANCE AT 100 HOURS (1ST SERVICE)
6.9.1 - Checking the braking distance

1
CAUTION
Periodically the brake fluid level.

The user should operate the brakes to test the braking action.

2
If the brakes work badly, call a service centre.
6.9.2 - Checking engine drivebelt tension
To adjust drivebelt tension, proceed as follows:
WARNING

3
Before doing any maintenance or repair work, stop the engine and take out the ignition key.

CAUTION
Inspect the belts over their entire length. If damaged, they must be renewed immediately.

4
CAUTION
If the fan belt (or belts) is (are) broken, do not start the engine for any reason whatsoever as the engine cooling system
will be disabled.

5
Engine belt
Front view of engine
1. Fan pulley
2. Alternator pulley
3. Crankshaft pulley
Belt tension adjuster screw

6
4.

7
Fig. 191

In order to check the tension, first remove the cover; this operation must be carried
out after the engine has been switched off and allowed to cool down.
Loosen the screw (4) indicated in the figure.
8

Move the alternator (2) using a lever


Tighten the screw (4).
The tension is correct when, pressing the belt in the middle with your thumb, the
belt deflects by 15�20 mm.
NOTE
9

Inspect the belts over their entire length. If damaged, it must be


replaced immediately
Fig. 192
If the deflection is not within the specified range, repeat the adjustment operations
until the correct value is obtained.
10

6-23

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 23 08/02/2013 21.13.22


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.9.3 - Changing the engine oil
WARNING
1

Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.

WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
2

turer’s manual.

Procedure for changing the engine oil


1. Park the tractor on level ground and wait for the engine to cool down.
2. Place a suitable container under the drain plug (1) on the right�hand side of the oil sump.
Unscrew the drain plug (1) in the oil sump.
3

3.
DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause se-
vere burns.
4

Fig. 193
5

4. When all the oil has drained from the sump, inspect the drain plug seal and,
if necessary, renew it before screwing the drain plug back in.
6

Fig. 194
7

5. Pour oil of the prescribed quality into the sump through the oil filler (1) until
the level is between the notches on the dipstick (2) � (3).
Restart the engine and let it idle for a few minutes, checking the seal of the
drain plug.
8
9

Fig. 195
10

6-24

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 24 08/02/2013 21.13.23


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6. Switch off the engine, wait for it to cool down, check the oil level again and,
if necessary, top up through the filler (1).

1
WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to
that already present.

2
Fig. 196

6.9.4 - Changing the engine oil filter cartridge

3
WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

WARNING

4
Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.

DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause severe burns.

5
Procedure for changing the engine oil filter cartridge
1. Park the tractor on level ground.
2. Place a suitable receptacle under the filter.

Fig. 197
6
7
3. Unscrew the cartridge.
8
CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must
be disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.
9
10

6-25

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 25 08/02/2013 21.13.23


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
4. Apply oil of the same type as that used for the engine to the new filter car-
tridge seal.
1
2

Fig. 198
5. Screw the cartridge on fully.
3
4

Fig. 199
6. Restart the engine and let it idle for a few minutes, checking the seals for leaks.
5

Switch off the engine, wait for it to cool down, check the oil level again and top up if necessary.
WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.
6

6.9.5 - Checking and cleaning the radiator (AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001, AGRO-


LUX 50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
->D10S653WT1E1001)
WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
7

turer’s manual.

Engine cooling system radiator


The radiator is located at the front of the tractor
1. Engine cooling system radiator
8
9

Fig. 200

Clean with a compressed air jet, or, if necessary, a steam jet (max. pressure 6 bar) or a water jet.
10

If you intend to clean the engine at the same time, protect the air cleaner, alternator and starter motor. Once all the removed compo�
compo-
nents have been refitted, run the engine for a few minutes so that it heats up and dries any parts that are still wet.

6-26

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 26 08/02/2013 21.13.24


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Cleaning with detergents
When cleaning with detergents, choose commercial products that dissolve oil.

1
The detergent/water solution can be applied by spray gun or brush.
After applying the solution, wait after few minutes, then rinse off with clean water.
Cleaning with compressed air
This cleaning method is only suitable for removing dust. Always clean the grilles in the engine compartment and grilles over the cab
filters by directing the air jet in the opposite direction to the normal air flow.

2
6.9.6 - Checking and cleaning the radiator (AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001)
WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

3
Engine cooling system radiator
The radiator is located at the front of the tractor
1. Engine cooling system radiator

4
5
Fig. 201

The coolers can be cleaned with a compressed air jet, or, if necessary, a steam jet (max. pressure 6 bar) or a water jet.
If you intend to clean the engine at the same time, protect the air filter, alternator and starter motor. Once all the removed components
have been refitted, run the engine for a few minutes so that it warms up and dries any parts that are still wet.

6
Cleaning with detergents
When cleaning with detergents, choose commercial products that dissolve oil.
The detergent/water solution can be applied by spray gun or brush.
After applying the solution, wait a few minutes then rinse off with clean water.
Cleaning with compressed air

7
This cleaning method is only suitable for removing dust. Always clean the grilles in the engine compartment or protecting the cab
filters by directing the air jet in the opposite direction to the normal air inflow.
6.9.7 - Changing the fuel filter cartridges (AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001, AGRO-
LUX 50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
->D10S653WT1E1001)
8

CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

WARNING
9

If fuel or oil under pressure hits the skin or eyes, it can cause serious injury, blindness or even death. High�pressure
fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks; never use your hands. Wear
safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from medical personnel
with experience of this particular problem.
10

6-27

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 27 08/02/2013 21.13.24


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
WARNING
Never fill the diesel tank when there are naked flames or in closed premises. Do not smoke while refuelling and always
1

switch off the engine beforehand.

DANGER
Take care not to cause dangerous sparks when working nearby stores of diesel or flammable materials.
2

CAUTION
Never continue to run the engine until the fuel tank is completely empty. If the engine stops because the tractor runs
of fuel, it will then be necessary to bleed the air from the fuel injection system.

CAUTION
3

Observe safety regulations when storing fuel in tanks.

Changing the fuel filter


1. Fixing bolts
4

2. Fuel filters
5

Fig. 202
6

Procedure for changing the fuel filter cartridges


Change the fuel filter cartridges at the intervals indicated in the maintenance chart.
7
8
9

Fig. 203 - Filter cartridges


1. Primary filter cartridge
2. Secondary filter cartridge
10

To change the cartridges proceed as follows:


l Park the tractor on level ground.

6-28

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 28 08/02/2013 21.13.24


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
l Place a suitable receptacle under the filters.
l Unscrew the filter bowl retaining screws in order to remove the cartridges (1) � (2).
Fit the new cartridges, renewing also the seals on the filter housing

1
l
l Tighten the retaining screw
l Bleed the filters by opening the bleed screws and operating the lift pump manually
IMPORTANT:
Position the filter cartridges carefully and renew the rubber seals.

2
6.9.8 - Changing the fuel filter (AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001)
CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

3
WARNING
If fuel or oil under pressure hits the skin or eyes, it can cause serious injury, blindness or even death. High�pressure
fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks; never use your hands. Wear
safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from medical personnel

4
with experience of this particular problem.
WARNING
Never fill the diesel tank when there are naked flames or in closed premises. Do not smoke while refuelling and always
switch off the engine beforehand.

5
DANGER
Take care not to cause dangerous sparks when working nearby stores of diesel or flammable materials.

CAUTION

6
Never continue to run the engine until the fuel tank is completely empty. If the engine stops because the tractor runs
of fuel, it will then be necessary to bleed the air from the fuel injection system.

CAUTION
Observe safety regulations when storing fuel in tanks.

7
Changing the fuel filter
1. Fuel filter
1. Retaining screw
8
9

Fig. 204

Procedure for changing the fuel filter


10

l Park the tractor on level ground.


l Place a suitable receptacle under the filter.
l Undo the screw ( 2) and remove the cartridge (1) from the filter body.

6-29

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 29 08/02/2013 21.13.25


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
l Fit the new filter cartrisge.
l Tighten the screw (2) to secure the cartridge to the filter body.
1

IMPORTANT:
Before refitting the filter cartridge apply oil to the rubber seal.

6.9.9 - Changing the gearbox oil filter (AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001, AGRO-


2

LUX 50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E


->D10S653WT1E1001)
DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause severe burns.
3

WARNING
Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.
4

WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High�
5

pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
The tractor is equipped with 44 micron filter:
The filter (1) is installed on the feed line before the hydrostatic steering pump and the hydraulic pump for the remote valves
6

and the lift. The oil returning from the steering system goes to lubricate the gearbox.
The filter, which is of the interchangeable cartridge type, is located on the left�hand side of the tractor.
1. Gearbox oil filter
2. Gearbox oil drain plug
7
8

Fig. 205

IMPORTANT:
9

If the warning light stays on when the oil is hot and the engine is running at normal operating speed, the transmission
oil filters are clogged. It is, however, quite normal for the warning light to stay illuminated for a few minutes after start-
ing the engine.
10

6-30

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 30 08/02/2013 21.13.26


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Changing the oil filter
1. Park the tractor on level ground.

1
2. Place a suitable receptacle under the filter.
3. Unscrew the cartridge.

2
3
Fig. 206
4. Apply oil of the same type as that used for the gearbox to the new filter
cartridge seal as shown in figure.

4
5
Fig. 207
5. Screw the new cartridge on by hand.

6
7
Fig. 208
6. On starting the engine, check for leaks around the cartridge seal.
7. Check the transmission oil level.

6.9.10 - Changing the transmission oil filters (AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001)


8

DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause severe burns.

WARNING
9

Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.

WARNING
10

Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

6-31

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 31 08/02/2013 21.13.27


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High�
1

pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
The tractor is equipped with two 44 micron filters:
l The filters (1) are installed on the suction line before the hydrostatic steering pump and the hydraulic pump for the control
2

valves and the lift. The oil returning from the steering system goes to lubricate the gearbox.
The filter, which is of the interchangeable cartridge type, is located on the left�hand side of the tractor.
1. Gearbox oil filter
2. Gearbox oil drain plug
3
4

Fig. 209

IMPORTANT:
If the warning light stays on when the oil is hot and the engine is running at normal operating speed, the transmission
5

oil filters are clogged. It is, however, quite normal for the warning light to stay illuminated for a few minutes after start-
ing the engine.
Changing the oil filter
1. Park the tractor on level ground.
2. Place a suitable receptacle under the filters.
6

3. Unscrew the cartridge.


7
8

Fig. 210
4. Apply oil of the same type as that used for the gearbox to the new filter
cartridge gasket as shown in figure.
9
10

Fig. 210

6-32

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 32 08/02/2013 21.13.28


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
5. Screw the new cartridge on by hand.

1
2
Fig. 211
6. On starting the engine, check for leaks around the cartridge seal.
7. Check the transmission oil level.

3
6.9.11 - Checking the parking brake lever
CAUTION
When applying the parking brake, the lever must always be pulled up all the way

4
The travel of the lever (1) must be approximately 150 mm; If not, contact an autho-
rised service centre to have the tie rod adjusted.

5
6
Fig. 212

IMPORTANT
If you need to park on a steep gradient � more than 15° (33% gradient) � place chocks under the rear wheels to im-
mobilise the tractor. It is any case recommended not to park the tractor on a steep gradient.

7
6.9.12 - Checking the oil pipelines
WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High�
pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
8

medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.


WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.
9

WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

Inspect the pipes for cracks or breaks and check for leaks from the pipe fittings or from the control valve.
10

6-33

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 33 08/02/2013 21.13.29


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.10 - MAINTENANCE EVERY 300 HOURS
6.10.1 - Checking the front axle oil level (4WD)
1

Checking the differential oil level (4WD)


WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.
2

WARNING
Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.

WARNING
3

Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High�
pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
Note:
4

Always park the tractor on a level surface when changing the oil or checking the oil level.

Remove the oil filler/level plug to check the oil level.


5
6

Fig. 213

Check the oil level of side final drives and planetary reduction unit (4WD)
7

Rotate the hub so that filler/level plug is aligned horizontally with the centre of the
hub.
The oil level should be up to the lower edge of the hole.
8

Fig. 214
9

6.10.2 - Adjusting the clutch pedal


CAUTION
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal or keep it partially depressed when driving as this could cause premature
wear of the clutch plates.
10

6-34

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 34 08/02/2013 21.13.30


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
CAUTION
Do not depress the clutch pedal or put the gearbox in neutral when driving downhill.

1
CAUTION
Avoid keeping the clutch pedal depressed when the tractor is stationary. Select neutral, even when stopping for brief
periods.

2
The clutch control is mechanical and normally requires no maintenance.
If however the free play at the pedal is found to to exceed 30 mm, contact your
authorised service centre.

3
4
Fig. 215

5
6
7
8
9
10

6-35

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 35 08/02/2013 21.13.30


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.11 - MAINTENANCE EVERY 600 HOURS
6.11.1 - Set engine valves clearance and fuel injectors
1

Adjusting the valve clearances


DANGER
Risk of burns when the engine is hot; wait for the engine to cool down before carrying out maintenance, inspections
or adjustments.
2

This maintenance operation must be carried out by an authorised service centre.


Fuel injectors
CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
3

disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High�
pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
4

medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.


WARNING
Do not smoke or allow naked flames in the vicinity when refuelling or servicing the fuel injection system.
5

This maintenance operation must be carried out by an authorised service centre.


6.11.2 - Checking the differential lock system
The operator performs this check. Test the controls and check that the differential lock is engaged and disengaged correctly.
6.11.3 - Front wheel hub bearings (2WD)
6

CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Remove the bearings, wash them in diesel fuel, and then refit, packing the hub
7

half full of grease.


8

Fig. 216

6.11.4 - Checking the braking system with safety brakes valve


9

WARNING
Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.
10

6-36

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 36 08/02/2013 21.13.31


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-

1
turer’s manual.

WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High�
pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your

2
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
This maintenance operation must be carried out by an authorised service centre.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

6-37

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 37 08/02/2013 21.13.31


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.12 - MAINTENANCE EVERY 1200 HOURS OR AT LEAST ONCE A YEAR
6.12.1 - Fuel injection pump maintenance
1

WARNING
Do not smoke or allow naked flames in the vicinity when refuelling or servicing the fuel injection system.

WARNING
2

Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High�
pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
This maintenance operation must be carried out by an authorised service centre.
3

6.12.2 - Cleaning engine air filter (AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX


50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
->D10S653WT1E1001)
The air is filtered by two filters of pleated paper protected by a case and contained in a plastic cylinder in front of the radiators.
4

CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

IMPORTANT:
5

The inner element is designed to prevent solid particles from entering the inlet manifold and must never be cleaned.
It must, however, be renewed after the main element has been cleaned 3 times.

IMPORTANT:
Periodically check the efficiency of the air filter dust ejector valve.
6

IMPORTANT:
Check regularly that the engine air cleaner housing and element are not damaged. Do not wash or brush the element.
7

IMPORTANT:
Periodically inspect the condition of the air cleaner casing and filter element.

IMPORTANT:
8

Do not use the tractor without the main air cleaner element fitted.

IMPORTANT:
Never use petrol, oil, kerosene or solvents to clean the element. Never attempt to blow the element clean using ex-
haust gas. Never add oil to the dry filter. Never use an element that shows signs of damage.
9
10

6-38

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 38 08/02/2013 21.13.31


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Procedure for disassembling the air filter
1. Release the two retaining clips and remove the filter cover (1). Take care

1
not to rotate the cover to avoid damaging the filter element.

2
Fig. 217

3
2. Extract the main element (2) of the filter

4
Fig. 218

5
3. If necessary (after the main filter has been cleaned 3 times) remove the
safety element (3) and renew it
This element must never be cleaned, but only renewed

6
7
Fig. 219
4. Refit the elements in the container by carrying out the above operations in reverse order
Fit the filter cover back on and lock it
Cleaning the dry air filter
When the clogged air filter warning light comes on, clean the filtering element to prevent the engine losing power or, worse, the engine
8
getting damaged.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure that the warning light is always working correctly. To check its operation, start the engine and temporarily
obstruct the air filter intake tube (do not use your hands). The filter element must always be in perfect working order;
if it is not, clean or wash it.
9

Cleaning the engine air filter using compressed air


Use this cleaning method when the filter is clogged with dust. Direct a jet of compressed air (max. pressure 6.8 bar) from the inside
to the outside of the element, moving the jet along the pleats in the paper until all the dust is removed.
Washing the engine air filter in water
This cleaning method is particularly recommended when the filter element is clogged with oily substances. It consists of washing the
10

element with clean water. Wash the element using a jet of clean water (max. pressure 2.9 bar) directed from the inside to the outside
of the element. Leave the element to dry in a dust free environment for 24 hours.

6-39

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 39 08/02/2013 21.13.32


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Procedure for washing the filter
1. Washing the filter element
1
2

Fig. 220
3

2. Cleaning the filter element using compressed air


4

Fig. 221
5

3. Eliminating residues remaining on the filter element by means of a water jet


6
7

Fig. 222
4. Inspecting the paper element for holes or tears using a light.
8
9

Fig. 223
10

6-40

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 40 08/02/2013 21.13.33


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Refitting the element
Wipe the air filter casing with a dry rag, and check that the element is not deformed. Hold a light inside the paper element to check

1
for tears or holes in the paper fabric. If no suitable light source is available simply check the filter element by observing the outer
surface of the pleated paper.
The filter element must be replaced after being cleaned 6 times, unless any small holes or tears are detected sooner, in which case
it must be renewed immediately.
The inner safety element must never be cleaned. It must, however, be replaced after the main element has been cleaned 3 times.

2
Oil bath filter (optional for 40-50-60hp)
Comprised of a prefilter and filter. The prefilter removes heavier particles from the
aspirated air, which, are expelled outwards by the centrifugal action of the filter.
The air is then passed through an oil bath where it is further filtered.

3
4
Fig. 224

Regular maintenance of the air filter is of fundamental importance for the smooth running of the engine. An excessively dirty filter can
lead to a significant loss of engine power; we therefore recommend that the air filter is kept constantly clean.
The air filter can be dismantled by releasing the clips; both the filter element and
the bath should be immersed in diesel fuel and then cleaned with a compressed

5
air jet.

6
Fig. 225

The bath should then be filled with new oil up to but not over the level indicator

7
holes.
The oil should be the same as that used for the engine; during the winter months,
the oil may be diluted with a small quantity of diesel fuel. 8

Fig. 226
9
10

6-41

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 41 08/02/2013 21.13.33


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
The intervals at which the filter oil should be changed will vary according to the
operating conditions. As a general rule, it should be changed a the start of the
1

working season, but it may require changing more or less frequently depending on
the amount of dust in the working environment.
All the hose clamps should be tightened firmly to prevent unfiltered air from enter-
ing the cylinders.
2

Fig. 227

6.12.3 - Cleaning engine air filter (AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001)


3

The air is filtered by two filters of pleated paper protected by a case and contained in a plastic cylinder in front of the radiators.
CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.
4

IMPORTANT:
The inner element is designed to prevent solid particles from entering the inlet manifold and must never be cleaned.
It must, however, be renewed after the main element has been cleaned 3 times.

IMPORTANT:
5

Periodically check the efficiency of the air filter dust ejector valve.

IMPORTANT:
Check regularly that the engine air cleaner casing and element are not damaged. Do not wash or brush the element.
6

IMPORTANT:
Periodically inspect the condition of the air cleaner casing and filter element.
7

IMPORTANT:
Do not use the tractor without the main air cleaner element fitted.

IMPORTANT:
8

Never use petrol, oil, kerosene or solvents to clean the element. Never attempt to blow the cartridge clean using ex-
haust gas. Never add oil to the dry filter. Never use a cartridge that shows signs of damage.
9
10

6-42

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 42 08/02/2013 21.13.33


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Procedure for disassembling the air filter
1. Release the two retaining clips and remove the filter cover (1). Take care

1
not to rotate the cover to avoid damaging the filter element.

2
Fig. 227

3
2. Extract the main element (2) of the filter

4
Fig. 227

5
3. If necessary (after the main filter has been cleaned 3 times) remove the
safety element (3) and renew it
This element must never be cleaned, but only renewed

6
7
Fig. 227
4. Refit the elements in the container by carrying out the above operations in reverse order
Fit the filter cover back on and lock it
8
9
10

6-43

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 43 08/02/2013 21.13.34


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Cleaning the dry air filter
When the clogged air filter warning light comes on, clean the filtering element to prevent the engine losing power or, worse, the engine
1

getting damaged.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure that the warning light is always working correctly. To check its operation, start the engine and temporarily
obstruct the air filter intake tube (do not use your hands). The filter element must always be in perfect working order;
if it is not, clean or wash it.
2

Cleaning the engine air filter using compressed air


Use this cleaning method when the filter is clogged with dust. Direct a jet of compressed air (max. pressure 6.8 bar) from the inside
to the outside of the element, moving the jet along the pleats in the paper until all the dust is removed.
Washing the engine air filter in water
This cleaning method, which is particularly recommended when the filter element is clogged with oily substances, consists of washing
3

the element with clean water. Wash the element using a jet of clean water (max. pressure 2.9 bar) directed from the inside to the
outside of the element. Leave the element to dry in a dust free environment for 24 hours.
Procedure for washing the filter
1. Washing the filter element
4
5

Fig. 227
2. Cleaning the filter element using compressed air
6
7

Fig. 227
3. Eliminating residues remaining on the filter element by means of a water jet
8
9

Fig. 227
10

6-44

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 44 08/02/2013 21.13.34


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
4. Inspecting the paper element for holes or tears using a light.

1
2
Fig. 227

Refitting the element

3
Wipe the air filter casing with a dry rag, and check that the element is not deformed. Hold a light inside the paper element to check
for tears or holes in the paper fabric. If no suitable light source is available simply check the filter element by observing the outer
surface of the pleated paper.
The filter element must be replaced after being cleaned 6 times, unless any small holes or tears are detected sooner, in which case
it must be renewed immediately.

4
The inner safety element must never be cleaned. It must, however, be replaced after the main element has been cleaned 3 times.
6.12.4 - Bleeding air and draining water from the fuel filters (AGROLUX 45 E
->D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E
->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E ->D10S653WT1E1001)
CAUTION

5
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

WARNING
If fuel or oil under pressure hits the skin or eyes, it can cause serious injury, blindness or even death. High�pressure

6
fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks; never use your hands. Wear
safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from medical personnel
with experience of this particular problem.
WARNING
Never fill the diesel tank when there are naked flames or in closed premises. Do not smoke while refuelling and always

7
switch off the engine beforehand.

DANGER
Take care not to cause dangerous sparks when working nearby stores of diesel or flammable materials.
8

CAUTION
Never continue to run the engine until the fuel tank is completely empty. If the engine stops because the tractor runs
of fuel, it will then be necessary to bleed the air from the fuel injection system.

CAUTION
9

Observe safety regulations when storing fuel in tanks.


10

6-45

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 45 08/02/2013 21.13.35


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Draining water from the fuel pre-filter
Always drain the water from the fuel pre�filter before returning the tractor to service
1

after the winter season.


Proceed as follows:
l Place a suitable receptacle under the filter (1).
l Loosen screw (3) and wait until all the water has drained from bowl (2).
l Retighten screw (3).
2

Fig. 228
3

Draining water and bleeding air from the fuel filter


The fuel filter has two elements: primary element (1) for the retention of large
particles and a secondary element (2) to retain smaller particles. Each filter has a
water drain valve (4) at the bottom and an air bleed screw (3) at the top.
4
5
6

Fig. 229

Draining water from the filters


Drain the water from the fuel filters by opening the screws (4) located at the bottom of the filter bowl to allow the fuel mixed with water
to flow out; close the valve as soon as the fuel emerges free of water.
7

Bleeding air from the filters


Bleed air from the filters by opening the screws (3) located on the top of the filters to allow the fuel mixed with air to flow out; close
the screw as soon as the fuel emerges free of air bubbles.
Fuel lift pump
8

WARNING
If fuel or oil under pressure hits the skin or eyes, it can cause serious injury, blindness or even death. High�pressure
fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks; never use your hands. Wear
safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from medical personnel
with experience of this particular problem.
9
10

6-46

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 46 08/02/2013 21.13.35


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
The fuel lift pump mounted on the timing cover, does not normally require any
maintenance; only if the pump fails to deliver fuel, remove and clean (or renew)

1
the internal filter and the valves. To operate the pump manually, press repeatedly
in the position indicated by the arrow.
The pump is operated manually by pressing firmly on the top, as shown by the
arrow.

2
Fig. 230

6.12.5 - Bleeding the fuel circuit (AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001)

3
This operation must be carried out when air has entered the fuel circuits (before the injection pumps).
WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

4
WARNING
If fuel or oil under pressure hits the skin or eyes, it can cause serious injury, blindness or even death. High�pressure
fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks; never use your hands. Wear
safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from medical personnel
with experience of this particular problem.

5
CAUTION
Never continue to run the engine until the fuel tank is completely empty. If the engine stops because the tractor runs
of fuel, it will then be necessary to bleed the air from the fuel injection system.

WARNING

6
Do not smoke or allow naked flames in the vicinity when refuelling or servicing the fuel injection system.

The causes may be:


l disassembly of components
l fuel tank completely drained

7
l poor sealing of pipes and fittings.
Under these conditions, the engine either fails to start completely or stops once it has started.
IMPORTANT
On no account loosen the unions of the fuel lines connecting the pumps and the injectors, as these need to be re-
tightened to a specific torque setting against the special copper seals, which must be renewed whenever the fittings
8

are disconnected.
To bleed the air from the system, loosen off the screw (1) located on top of the fuel
filter (2) and operate the lift pump (3) manually until the fuel that emerges is free
from air bubbles.
9
10

Fig. 231

6-47

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 47 08/02/2013 21.13.36


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
The fuel lift pump, mounted on the timing cover, does not normally require any
maintenance. If the pump fails to deliver fuel, remove and clean (or renew) the
1

internal filter and the valves.


2

Fig. 232

IMPORTANT
3

The fuel pump lever should offer some resistance when operated by hand. If not, turn over the starter motor in order
to determine the pump priming position (cam lobes on camshaft at top dead centre).

6.12.6 - Starter motor maintenance


This maintenance operation must be carried out by an authorised service centre.
4

DANGER
Never start the engine by shorting across the terminals of the starter motor as the tractor could suddenly move off, with
a consequent risk of injury to the operator.
5
6
7
8
9
10

6-48

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 48 08/02/2013 21.13.37


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.13 - MAINTENANCE EVERY 1200 HOURS OR AT LEAST EVERY TWO YEARS
6.13.1 - Changing the coolant and flushing the circuit (AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001,

1
AGROLUX 50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX
70 E ->D10S653WT1E1001)
Flush the cooling circuit using a specific detergent.
WARNING

2
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is still hot. The radiator is under pressure when hot, and if opened,
boiling liquid and steam can escape and cause serious injury to yourself and anyone else in the vicinity. Before remov-
ing the radiator cap, stop the engine and wait for the circuit to cool down.
Procedure for changing the coolant and flushing the circuit
1. Park the tractor on level ground.

3
The engine must be switched off and the coolant cold.
2. Place a suitable receptacle under the plug.
3. Drain the cooling circuit by opening plug on the LH side of the engine.

4
5
Fig. 233
4. Move the receptacle under the radiator.
5. Drain the radiator by removing the the drain plug on the bottom left�hand
side.
Disconnect the expansion tank from the radiator and drain off the coolant.

6
CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any
fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be dis-
posed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

7
Fig. 234
8
6. Refit the expansion tank and replace all the plugs removed previously; fill
the cooling system and the radiator with the recommended detergent mix-
ture through the filler hole (1) .
Fill the expansion tank (2) up to the MAX level through the filler hole (3).
9

Fig. 235
10

6-49

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 49 08/02/2013 21.14.01


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
7. Start the engine run it at idle speed for approximately one and a half hours;
IMPORTANT:
1

When the engine is running, check that the detergent mixture level does not below the minimum mark on the
expansion tank.
8. Switch off the engine, drain the system and then fill it with water; then start the engine again bring it up to a speed of approx.
1000 rpm. and leave it running for 5 minutes;
9. Drain the system once again;
2

10. Refill the circuit with coolant, run the engine for a few minutes and then top up the system if necessary.

6.13.2 - Changing the coolant and flushing the circuit (AGROLUX 4.80 E
->D10S714WT1E10001)
Flush the cooling circuit using a specific detergent.
WARNING
3

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is still hot. The radiator is under pressure when hot, and if opened,
boiling liquid and steam can escape and cause serious injury to yourself and anyone else in the vicinity. Before remov-
ing the radiator cap, stop the engine and wait for the circuit to cool down.
Procedure for changing the coolant and flushing the circuit
4

1. Park the tractor on level ground.


The engine must be switched off and the coolant cold.
2. Place a suitable receptacle under the drain plug.
3. Drain the cooling circuit by opening plug on the LH side of the engine.
5
6

Fig. 235
4. Move the receptacle under the radiator.
5. Drain the radiator by removing the the drain plug on the bottom left�hand
side.
7

Empty the expansion tank located in front of the radiator after disconnect-
ing it from the radiator.
CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any
fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be dis-
8

posed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Fig. 235
9
10

6-50

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 50 08/02/2013 21.14.02


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6. Refit the expansion tank and previously opened plugs, and fill the circuit
and radiator with the detergent solution via filler (1);

1
Fill the expansion tank (2) up to the MAX level. through the filler hole (3);

2
Fig. 236
7. Start the engine run it at idle speed for approximately one and a half hours.
IMPORTANT:

3
When the engine is running, check that the detergent mixture level does not below the minimum mark on the
expansion tank.
8. Switch off the engine, drain the system and then fill it with water; then start the engine again bring it up to a speed of approx.
1000 rpm. and leave it running for 5 minutes;
9. Drain the system once again;

4
10. Refill the circuit with coolant, run the engine for a few minutes and then top up the system if necessary.

6.13.3 - Changing the transmission oil (AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001, AGRO-


LUX 50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
->D10S653WT1E1001)

5
WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

IMPORTANT:
Dispose of the used oil and filter in accordance with applicable regulations. DO NOT dump oil on the ground, in sewers

6
or containers that are not sealed. Respect the environment.

IMPORTANT:
Renew the filter at the time of each oil change.

7
Procedure for changing the transmission oil
WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High�
pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
8

hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
9
10

6-51

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 51 08/02/2013 21.14.03


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
l Park the tractor on level ground.
l Unscrew the plug with integral breather (1) located on the lift cover.
1
2

Fig. 237

l Remove the plug (2) located on the right�hand side of the gearbox at the
3

rear. This is the transmission oil level inspection plug.


4

Fig. 238
5

l Remove the drain plug (3) located under the gearbox, placing a suitable
receptacle under the hole.
DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause severe
burns.
6

Fig. 239
7

WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.

l Renew the oil filter (4) positioned on the left�hand side of the gearbox.
8
9

Fig. 240
10

6-52

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 52 08/02/2013 21.14.03


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
l Fit and tighten the drain plug (3) and fill the gearbox with oil through the
filler hole (1) located on top of the lift cover until the level reaches the lower

1
edge of the inspection hole (2)

2
Fig. 241

After filling, screw in the oil filler plug and run the engine for a few minutes.
Check the oil level by removing the oil level inspection plug (2) and top up if necessary.

3
6.13.4 - Changing the transmission oil (AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001)
WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

4
IMPORTANT:
Dispose of used oil and filters in compliance with applicable regulations. DO NOT dump oil on the ground, in sewers
or containers that are not sealed. Respect the environment.

5
IMPORTANT:
Change the filters at the same time as the oil.

Procedure for changing the transmission oil

6
WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High�
pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.

7
l Park the tractor on level ground.
l Unscrew the plug with integral breather (1) located on the lift cover .

Fig. 241
9
10

6-53

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 53 08/02/2013 21.14.04


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
l Remove plug (2) located on the right�hand side of the gearbox at the rear.
This is the transmission oil level inspection plug.
1
2

Fig. 241

l Remove drain plug (3) located under the gearbox after placing a suitable
3

receptacle under the hole.


DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause severe
burns.
4

Fig. 241
5

WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.

l Renew oil filters (4) located on the left�hand side of the gearbox.
6
7

Fig. 242

l Fit and tighten drain plug (3) and fill the gearbox with oil through filler hole
8

(1) located on top of the lift cover until the level reaches the lower edge of
inspection hole (2)
9

Fig. 242
10

After filling, screw in the oil filler plug and run the engine for a few minutes.
Check the oil level by removing the oil level inspection plug (2) and top up if necessary.

6-54

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 54 08/02/2013 21.14.05


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.13.5 - Changing the differential oil, planetary reduction unit oil and side final drives oil
(4WD)

1
Changing the differential oil and planetary reduction unit oil (4WD)
CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

2
DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause severe burns.

WARNING

3
Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.

WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-

4
turer’s manual.

WARNING
If fuel or oil under pressure hits the skin or eyes, it can cause serious injury, blindness or even death. High�pressure
fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks; never use your hands. Wear
safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from medical personnel

5
with experience of this particular problem.
Drain the oil from drain hole located under the centre of the front axle.

6
7
Fig. 243

Fill oil through the hole on the right�hand side, as shown in the figure, until the oil
level is up to the lower edge of the hole.
WARNING
8

Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that


already present.
9

Fig. 243
10

6-55

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 55 08/02/2013 21.14.06


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Changing the oil of the side final drives (4WD)
Drain the used oil from the drain hole located at the bottom of the hub.
1
2

Fig. 244
3

Fill oil through the hole, as shown in the figure, until the oil level is up to the lower
edge.
WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that
already present.
4

Fig. 244
5

6.13.6 - Checking the steering box oil level (AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001, AGRO-
LUX 50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
->D10S653WT1E1001)
Differential oil level check
6

WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.

WARNING
7

Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.

WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High�
pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
8

hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
Note:
Always park the tractor on a level surface when changing the oil or checking the oil level.
9
10

6-56

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 56 08/02/2013 21.14.07


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
The oil level check is performed through the hole after removing the relative plug
(1).

1
The level is correct when the oil reaches the lower rim of the filler hole.

2
Fig. 245

Changing the oil in the steering box

3
l Park the tractor on level ground.
l Remove plug (1) located on the right�hand side of the steering box.
l Remove plug (2) located on the right�hand side of the steering box, after
placing a suitable receptacle underneath.
l Screw in plug (2) and fill the steering box with oil (approx. 0.7 litres of the
same oil as that used in the gearbox) through hole (1). The level is correct

4
when the oil reaches the lower rim of the filler hole.

Fig. 246

5
IMPORTANT:
Renew the seal each time a plug is removed.

6
7
8
9
10

6-57

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 57 08/02/2013 21.14.07


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.14 - GENERAL MAINTENANCE
6.14.1 - Bleeding the hydraulic braking system
1

CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

WARNING
2

Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

Note:
Always park the tractor on a level surface when changing the oil or checking the oil level.
3

In the case of poor braking action, either contact an authorized service centre or check for air in the hydraulic circuit as follows:
l separate the two brake pedals by detaching the connecting bolt.
4
5

Fig. 247

l set the “SEPARATE BRAKES” valve control (1) to OFF position.


6
7

Fig. 248

l operate the right�hand brake pedal several times in quick succession;


8

l then, keeping the pedal fully depressed, slightly unscrew and immediately
re�close the air bleed screw for the rear right�hand brake. Repeat this op-
eration as many times as necessary until clean hydraulic fluid, free of any
air bubbles, can be seen flowing out of the bleed screw.
9

WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing
serious injury, blindness or even death. High�pressure fluid leaks
may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking
for leaks. NEVER use your hands. Wear safety goggles to protect
10

your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate at-
Fig. 249
tention from medical personnel with experience of this particular
problem.

6-58

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 58 08/02/2013 21.14.08


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Repeat this procedure on the bleed screw for the front right�hand brake.

1
2
Fig. 250

Proceed likewise for the front left�hand brake and rear left�hand brake, loosening the relative bleed screws.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

6-59

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 59 08/02/2013 21.14.08


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK


6
7
8
9
10

6-60

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 60 08/02/2013 21.14.08


1
2
3
4
5
7 - FAULT DIAGNOSIS

6
7
8
9
10

7-1

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 1 08/02/2013 21.14.08


FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.1 - ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the front and rear PTO.
1

Table 9
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
The engine fails to start or starts with dif- Incorrect start-up procedure. Review the start�up procedure.
ficulty Low level or lack of fuel. Check the fuel level.
Air in the fuel pipes. Bleed the fuel system.
Low ambient temperature. Use the cold start device.
2

Fuel system contaminated. Clean and bleed the fuel system.


Wrong engine oil viscosity. Use oil of the right viscosity.
Fuel filter(s) obstructed. Renew the filter.
Injector operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.
Inefficient fuel pump. Check the pump works properly.
Fuel unsuited to the working temperature. Use fuel of the right type for the tempera-
3

ture conditions.
Battery cut�off device turned on. Turn off the device.
Low starter motor speed. Check the starter motor and the battery.
Wrong type of fuel. Drain the tank and the system completely.
Contact your fuel supplier.
The engine turns irregularly and/or stalls Fuel filter(s) obstructed. Renew the filter.
4

Fuel system contaminated. Clean and bleed the fuel system.


Fuel cap breather obstructed. Wash the cap in clean diesel and check the
breather is clear.
Injector operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.
The engine pings Incorrect injection pump timing and syn- Contact an authorised dealer.
chronization.
Low engine oil level. Top up with oil as needed.
5

The engine lacks power Engine overload. Shift down gear, reduce the tow load.
Air filter clogged. Service the air filter.
Fuel filter(s) obstructed. Renew the filter.
Inadequate fuel. Use the right type of fuel.
Wrong engine valve clearance. Contact an authorised dealer.
Injector operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.
6

Injection pump operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.


Fast idle speed set too low. Contact an authorised dealer.
Air leakage in the intake or exhaust mani- Check and adjust or contact an authorized
fold. dealer.
Turbocharger operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.
Incorrect implement adjustment. Refer to the implement operator’s manual.
Feed pipe obstructed.
7

Contact an authorised dealer.


Air in the fuel system. Bleed the fuel system.
Engine overheating Low level of refrigerant. Check whether there are any leaks in the
cooling system.
Faulty thermostat(s). Contact an authorised dealer.
Radiators dirty or obstructed. Clean.
Engine overload. Shift down gear, reduce the tow load.
8

Faulty pressurized plug on the radiator. Renew the plug.


Cooling system obstructed. Contact an authorised dealer.
Fan belt slack or worn. Check the tension of the belt and renew it
if worn out.
Temperature transmitter or indicator oper- Contact an authorised dealer.
ating trouble.
9

Grilles on the casing obstructed. Clean.


Low engine operating temperature Thermostat operating trouble. Renew the thermostat(s).
Temperature sensor or indicator faulty. Contact an authorised dealer.
Low engine oil pressure Low oil level. Top up with oil as needed.
Wrong oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with the correct oil.
Oil pump broken. Contact an authorised dealer.
10

Oil pressure sensor broken. Contact an authorised dealer.

7-2

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 2 08/02/2013 21.14.09


FAULT DIAGNOSIS
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Engine oil consumption too high Wrong oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with the correct oil.

1
Turbocharger operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.
Oil seepage outside. Contact an authorised dealer.
Engine oil level too high. Reduce the oil level as needed.
Valve guides or seals worn. Contact an authorised dealer.
Dust intake. Check the air intake system, filter and man-
ifolds.
Fuel consumption too high Turbocharger operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.

2
Engine overload. Shift down gear, reduce the tow load.
Air filter clogged. Service the air filter.
Inadequate fuel. Use the right type of fuel.
Wrong engine valve clearance. Contact an authorised dealer.
Injector operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.
Incorrect implement adjustment. Refer to the implement operator’s manual.
Injection pump operating trouble.

3
Contact an authorised dealer.
Air leakage in the intake or exhaust mani- Check and adjust or contact an authorized
fold. dealer.
Engine timing off. Contact an authorised dealer.
Engine emits white smoke Inadequate fuel. Use the right type of fuel.
Preheating system trouble. Check the preheating system.
Turbocharger operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.

4
Engine emits black smoke Injector operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.

5
6
7
8
9
10

7-3

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 3 08/02/2013 21.14.09


FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.2 - GEARBOX TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the tractor’s gearbox.
1

Table 10
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Gearbox operating temperature too high Oil level too high. Check the oil level.
Gearbox oil cooler obstructed or dirty Clean.
(where applicable).
Wrong oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with the correct oil.
2

Noisy gearbox Low oil level. Check the oil level and top up if necessary.
Wrong oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with the correct oil.
Bearings worn or parts broken. Contact an authorised dealer.
Difficulty in engaging gears The clutch fails to disengage completely. Contact an authorised dealer.
External control linkage badly adjusted or Adjust the linkage, renew the worn parts, or
worn. contact an authorised dealer.
3

Gear selector forks or synchronizers worn. Contact an authorised dealer.


The tractor does not move. Check that all the controls are set correctly. Contact an authorised dealer.
Poor control when using the clutch pedal Control mechanism malfunction. Contact an authorised dealer.
Slips out of gear or not possible to disen- Worn synchronizers/couplings. Gear shift Contact an authorised dealer.
gage the gear linkage incorrectly adjusted.
External control linkage badly adjusted or Adjust the linkage, renew the worn parts, or
4

worn. contact an authorised dealer.


Gear selector forks or synchronizers worn. Contact an authorised dealer.
Bearings worn. Contact an authorised dealer.
Low oil pressure for the services and gear- Gearbox oil filter obstructed. Renew the filter.
box lubrication Wrong oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with the correct oil.
Oil pump inefficient/broken. Contact an authorised dealer.
Shuttle drive direction clutch engagement The clutch engagement must be adjusted.
5

Contact an authorised dealer.


is sharp or too modulated
Clutch screeches during engagement Limited screeching noise is to be consid- -
ered normal with a cerametallic clutch
plate.
Sudden high-pitched screeching noise. Contact an authorised dealer.
Powershift gear changes are brusque, The Powershift gearbox must be adjusted.
6

Contact an authorised dealer.


jerky or the tractor stalls
7
8
9
10

7-4

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 4 08/02/2013 21.14.09


FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.3 - POWER TAKE-OFF TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the tractor’s gearbox.

1
Table 11
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
The clutch slips Check the clutch engagement device. Overhaul the engagement device. Contact
an authorised dealer.
Possible wear of clutch plates. Overhaul the clutch assembly.
PTO fails to stop when disengaged. Overhaul the engagement device. Contact

2
The clutch fails to disengage
an authorised dealer.
Overhaul the PTO braking device. Contact
an authorised dealer.
Check the clutch engagement device. Overhaul the engagement device. Contact
an authorised dealer.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-5

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 5 08/02/2013 21.14.09


FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.4 - FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the front and rear PTO.
1

Table 12
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Excessive wear of universal joint cross Oil leaks. Renew the faulty seals.
journals
Early tyre wear Wrong tyre pressure. Check the pressure of the tyres.
2

Wheel toe-in. Contact an authorised dealer.


Rolling or mechanical ratio. Contact an authorised dealer.
Wheel oscillation. Check steering knuckles for wear and re-
new them if necessary. Contact an autho-
rised dealer.
Continued use of the front�wheel drive dur- Avoid using the front�wheel drive when
3

ing transport by road. possible.


4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-6

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 6 08/02/2013 21.14.09


FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.5 - BRAKES TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the front and rear PTO.

1
Table 13
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Brake pedal travel too great Leakage from the brake bleed valve. Contact an authorised dealer.
Oil leakage from the pipes. Contact an authorised dealer.
Brake discs worn. Contact an authorised dealer.
Air in the system. Bleed the system. Contact an authorised

2
dealer.
Brake piston gaskets defective. Contact an authorised dealer.
Transmission breather device obstructed. Clean/renew the breather. Contact an au-
thorised dealer.
Leakage in the control system. Contact an authorised dealer.
The brake pedal moves down Leakage in the pump control system. Contact an authorised dealer.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-7

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 7 08/02/2013 21.14.09


FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.6 - LIFT TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the tractor’s lift.
1

Table 14
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
The lift does not move when the control le- No oil flow/pressure in the hydraulic circuit. Contact an authorised dealer.
ver is operated Incorrect use of the control. Review the procedure for using the lift.
Lifting height limit control positioned incor- Adjust the lifting height limit control.
2

rectly.
Fault in the lift position sensor circuit. Contact an authorised dealer.
The external lift control does not work, Control linkage badly adjusted or broken. Contact an authorised dealer.
The lift fails to rise completely or rises Lifting height limit control positioned incor- Adjust the lifting height limit control.
slowly rectly.
Excessive load on the lift. Reduce the load.
The lift lowers slowly Lowering speed control positioned incor- Adjust the lowering speed control.
3

rectly.
The lift responds slowly to changes in load Position/draft control set incorrectly. Adjust the position/draft control.
in draft control mode Lowering speed too slow. Adjust the lowering speed control.
Implement not adjusted correctly. Contact an authorised dealer.
The lift response is too sensitive in draft Position/draft control set badly. Adjust the position/draft control.
control mode
4

The implement fails to reach the required Lift rods too short. Adjust the lift rods.
working depth No implement soil penetration. Refer to the implement operator’s manual.
After parking the tractor and stopping the Internal leakage in the circuit. Contact an authorised dealer.
engine, the lift lowers too quickly
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-8

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 8 08/02/2013 21.14.09


FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.7 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the tractor’s gearbox.

1
Table 15
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
The hydraulic system does not work Hydraulic oil level very low. Top up with oil as needed.
Hydraulic oil filter(s) obstructed. Clean and if necessary renew the oil
filter(s).

2
Internal seepage. Contact an authorised dealer.
The hydraulic oil overheats Incorrect hydraulic oil level. Check and adjust the oil level as required.
Remote control valve activated, not in neu- Check the position of the control levers.
tral position.
Hydraulic load not suited to the tractor. Contact an authorised dealer.
High�pressure internal blow�by. Contact an authorised dealer.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-9

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 9 08/02/2013 21.14.09


FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.8 - HYDRAULIC REMOTE VALVES TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the front and rear PTO.
1

Table 16
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
The kick out of the remote valve disengag- Pressure of oil delivered to the connected Contact an authorised dealer.
es too soon equipment too high.
Block time set wrongly. Set the time correctly.
Mechanical fault with the remote valve.
2

Contact an authorised dealer.


The cylinder of the remote controlled im- Incorrect setting of the flow regulator Set the flow regulator.
plement works too slowly (where applicable).
Hoses connected incorrectly. Connect the hoses correctly.
The load is greater than the capacity of the Reduce the load or use a cylinder of an
system. adequate size (ask an authorized dealer).
Limited movement of the remote valves Adjust the tie rods or ask an authorized
3

control lever. dealer.


Travel of the remote controlled cylinder too Incorrect flow rate. Adjust the flow rate (if possible).
fast or too slow
Direction of travel of the remote controlled Incorrect hose fittings. Reverse the hose fittings.
cylinder reversed
The hoses do not match Incorrect hose male fittings. Renew them with fittings to ISO standards.
4

The remote valve control lever fails to re- Lever mechanism broken. Contact an authorised dealer.
lease
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-10

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 10 08/02/2013 21.14.09


FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.9 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the front and rear PTO.

1
Table 17
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Low start�up speed � the engine is turned Battery terminal connections corroded or Clean and tighten the connections.
over too slowly loose.
Low battery output. Contact an authorised dealer.
Wrong engine oil viscosity. Use oil of the right viscosity for the ambient

2
temperature.
The starter motor does not work Battery or starter motor connections cor- Clean and tighten the connections.
roded or loose.
Battery completely flat. Charge or renew the battery.
Start�up signal switch (or switches) tripped. Run the start-up procedure again. Contact

3
an authorised dealer.
Blown fuse. Change the fuse.
Control levers in wrong position Run the start-up procedure again. Contact
an authorised dealer.
The alternator warning light stays on when Low engine idling speed. Increase the engine idling speed.
the engine is running Drive belt broken or slack. Check/renew the belt.
Alternator operating trouble. Have the alternator checked by an autho-

4
rised dealer.
The battery fails to charge Alternator operating trouble. Have the alternator checked by an autho-
rised dealer.
Terminals loose or corroded. Clean and tighten the connections.
Drive belt slack or worn. Check the belt. Renew the belt if neces-
sary.

5
Battery operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.
The lighting system does not work, where- Blown fuse. Change the fuse.
as the rest of the electrical system does
work
The entire electrical system does not work Battery terminal connections corroded or Clean and tighten the connections.
loose.

6
Battery cut�off switch disconnected. Reactivate the switch.
Battery sulphated or worn. Check the level and density of the electro-
lyte.
Blown fuse. Change the fuse.
Faulty fan The fan does not work. Check all the fan fuses. Contact an autho-
rised dealer.

7
8
9
10

7-11

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 11 08/02/2013 21.14.09


FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.10 - FAULT DIAGNOSIS
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the front and rear PTO.
1

Table 18
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
The tractor swings or jerks Wrong quantity of water in the tyres (if Check the level. Contact an authorised
added). dealer.
Possible tyre ovality Check the tyre centring. Contact an autho-
2

rised dealer.
Incorrect weight distribution on the tractor. Check the weight distribution. Contact an
authorised dealer.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-12

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 12 08/02/2013 21.14.09


1
2
3
4
5
8 - WHEELS

6
7
8
9
10

8-1

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 1 08/02/2013 21.14.10


WHEELS
8.1 - INTRODUCTION
8.1.1 - General information regarding tyres
1

Alternative tyres
If the tractor is equipped with alternative tyres, observe the permissible load and speed specifications! For information on alternative
tyres and the relative type approval, load capacity, inflation pressure, track width, etc. always ask your nearest dealer for information,
given the very large number of different tyre types!
2

WARNING
Tyre changing operations can be dangerous and must be carried out by specialised personnel using specific equip-
ment in accordance with the instructions provided by the manufacturers of the tyres and wheels. Mismatched tyres
and wheels can cause damage and may cause the tyre to explode with the consequent risk of serious injury or death.
Never fit or use damaged tyres or rims.
Correct procedure for tyre fitting
3

Tyres must always be oriented in accordance with the tractor’s direction of forward
travel; you can change the track width in the case of rims welded to the flange by
shifting the wheel from left to right and vice versa, always ensuring that the “V”
cleats on the tyre tread point in the direction of forward travel, as shown in the
figure.
4
5

Fig. 251

WARNING
Only allow trained personnel to change tyres. Tyre failure is usually the result of incorrect use, incorrect inflation pres-
sure, overloading or speeds in excess of the maximum permitted speed. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer
and check the inflation pressure frequently.
6

Do not carry out any welding on the rim or flange without first removing the tyre: the heat could cause the tyre to
explode.
Do not use inflammable materials in repair operations.
Do not carry out any inspections of a tyre or hit a tyre without previously deflating it.
WARNING
7

Always check that the tyre is seated correctly on both sides. If not, deflate the tyre completely and lubricate the seat
on the rim, then re�inflate the tyre. Do not increase the pressure to help seat the tyre on the rim. Doing so can be
extremely dangerous, and can lead to serious or even fatal injury.
Adjustment of the steering angle
Check the steering angle each time that the front wheels are changed.
8

Proceed as follows:
l Apply the handbrake.
l Immobilise the tractor using the wheel chock.
l Raise the front of the tractor.
l Turn the steering wheel full lock to the left and subsequently to the right or
9

vice versa and pivot the axle to its position of maximum oscillation.
10

Fig. 252

8-2

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 2 08/02/2013 21.14.10


WHEELS
When the front axle is in the condition of maximum oscillation and the wheels are turned to the maximum steering angle, there must
be no interference between the fenders and engine hood.

1
If necessary, adjust the steering angle using adjusting bolts (1).
Inflation pressure
DANGER
Keep the tyres at the right pressure. Inflation pressure must be calculated and adjusted in relation to the load sup-
ported by the tyres and the operating conditions (consult tyre manufacturer load�pressure scales).

2
WARNING
Never inflate tyres above the pressure of 2.5 bar.

3
WARNING
When carrying out any operations on the tyres, always stand clear of the area in which the rim and flange could be pro-
pelled in the event of explosion. Always use metal safety cages or tyre retainers on the rims and flange when inflating
tyres; under some circumstances the trajectory of the rim and flange in case of explosion could change unexpectedly,
with SERIOUS DANGER OF INJURY AND DEATH.

4
Radial tyre inflation pressure
WARNING
For the tyre bead to seat correctly on the rim, the inflation pressure must never exceed 2 bar (29 psi) If the tyre is not
seated correctly on the rim, deflate it and repeat the operation. Higher inflation pressures may cause the tyre/rim to
explode. We recommend using all the appropriate safety devices when inflating tyres.

5
WARNING
A tire inflated to less than 80% of the recommended inflation pressure can be damaged internally during use and
explode on inflation to the optimal pressure WITH DANGER OF SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

IMPORTANT

6
When working on agricultural land in conditions requiring maximum grip, the rear tyre inflation pressure may be re-
duced. Check the manufacturer’s minimum specified pressure before partially deflating the tyres.

Tyres for non�driving front wheels: 2.3 bar;


Tyres for driving front wheels: 1.4 bar;
Rear tyres: 1.6 bar.

7
Conventional tyre inflation pressure
Tyres for non�driving front wheels: 3.0 bar;
16” to 30” tyres: 2.0 bar;
32” to 48” tyres: 2.2 bar.
8
IMPORTANT
If the tractor is fitted with this sort of tyres, the pressure must be checked and restored more frequently than indicated
in the service table.
9
10

8-3

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 3 08/02/2013 21.14.10


WHEELS
8.2 - TYRE COMBINATIONS
8.2.1 - Permissible tyre combinations
1

For 4-wheel drive tractors


For each market, only the homologated tyre combinations specific to the region are available.
The value may vary according to the make of tyre and the inflation pressure.
IMPORTANT:
2

On urban roads, legislation requires the maximum width of the tractor to be no greater than X + 800. (the dimension
X refers to the position of the tractor’s side lights).

WARNING
Use only the permitted tyre combinations compatible with the transmission ratio between front and rear wheels. Use
of unauthorised tyre combinations can lead to rapid tyre wear. Overloads caused by incorrect tyre combinations may
3

also damage the axles and transmission.


Standard rear axle, BKT front tyres/MRF rear tyres (TITAN front rims/INDIA rear rims)
Table 19
ID FRONT 50 60 TRACK WIDTH WIDTH (1) MM
4

REAR
1 11.2�20” X X 1460 1745
13.6�28” 1413 1769
2 8.00�20” X X 1428 1663
12.4�28” 1301 1623
3 11.2�20” X X 1460 1745
14.9�28” 1439 1824
5

4 12.5�20” X X 1460 1745


16.9�28” 1415 1843
(1) � Width here refers to the maximum width of the tractor with standard track setting.
ID: The numbers in the first column 1, 2, 3, etc. refer to the tables on the following pages.
Heavy�duty rear axle, BKT front tyres/MRF rear tyres (TITAN front rims/INDIA rear rims)
6

Table 20
ID FRONT 50 60 70 75 TRACK WIDTH (1)
REAR WIDTH MM
1 11.2�20” X X X X 1460 1745
13.6�28” 1505 1861
2 8.00�20” X X X X 1428 1663
7

12.4�28” 1394 1716


3 11.2�24” X X X X 1454 1738
16.9�30” 1446 1881
4 11.2�20” X X X X 1460 1745
14.9�28” 1453 1838
5 12.5�20” X X X X 1460 1785
8

16.9�28” 1522 1950


6 9.5�24” X X X X 1360 1601
18.4�26” 1492 1959
(1) � Width here refers to the maximum width of the tractor with standard track setting.
ID: The numbers in the first column 1, 2, 3, etc. refer to the tables on the following pages.
Standard rear axle, BKT radial tyres (TITAN rims)
9

Table 21
ID FRONT 50 60 TRACK WIDTH WIDTH (1) MM
REAR
1 9.50R20” X X 1460 1711
13.6R28” 1411 1764
10

2 7.50R20” X X 1428 1628


12.4R28” 1307 1636

8-4

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 4 08/02/2013 21.14.11


WHEELS
ID FRONT 50 60 TRACK WIDTH WIDTH (1) MM
REAR
3 11.2R20” X X 1460 1752

1
14.9R28” 1411 1791
4 12.4R20” X X 1460 1789
16.9R28” 1407 1845
(1) � Width here refers to the maximum width of the tractor with standard track setting.
ID: The numbers in the first column 1, 2, 3, etc. refer to the tables on the following pages.

2
Heavy�duty rear axle, BKT radial tyres (TITAN rims)
Table 22
ID FRONT 50 60 70 75 TRACK WIDTH (1)
REAR WIDTH MM
1 9.50R20” X X X X 1460 1711
13.6R28”

3
1502 1855
2 7.50R20” X X X X 1428 1628
12.4R28” 1400 1729
3 11.2R24” X X X X 1454 1746
16.9R30” 1502 1940
4 11.2R20” X X X X 1460 1752
14.9R28” 1502 1882

4
5 12.4R20” X X X X 1460 1789
16.9R28” 1498 1936
(1) � Width here refers to the maximum width of the tractor with standard track setting.
ID: The numbers in the first column 1, 2, 3, etc. refer to the tables on the following pages.
Standard rear axle, BKT conventional tyres (TITAN front rims/INDIA rear rims)

5
Table 23
ID FRONT 50 60 TRACK WIDTH WIDTH (1) MM
REAR
1 9.50�20” X X 1460 1700
13.6�28” 1412 1757
2 7.50�20” X X 1428 1642

6
12.4�28” 1301 1626
3 11.2�20” X X 1460 1745
14.9�28” 1439 1817
4 9.5�24” X X 1526 1758
16.9�28” 1439 1868
(1) � Width here refers to the maximum width of the tractor with standard track setting.

7
ID: The numbers in the first column 1, 2, 3, etc. refer to the tables on the following pages.
Heavy�duty rear axle, BKT conventional tyres (TITAN front rims/INDIA rear rims)
Table 24
ID FRONT 50 60 70 75 TRACK WIDTH (1)
REAR WIDTH MM
8

1 9.50�20” X X X X 1460 1700


13.6�28” 1355 1700
2 7.50�20” X X X X 1428 1642
12.4�28” 1394 1719
3 11.2�24” X X X X 1454 1738
16.9�30” 1446 1875
9

4 11.2�20” X X X X 1460 1745


14.9�28” 1453 1831
5 9.5�24” X X X X 1526 1758
16.9�28” 1522 1951
(1) � Width here refers to the maximum width of the tractor with standard track setting.
ID: The numbers in the first column 1, 2, 3, etc. refer to the tables on the following pages.
10

8-5

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 5 08/02/2013 21.14.11


WHEELS
For 2-wheel drive tractors
Standard/Heavy�duty rear axle, MRF tyres (INDIA rims)
1

Table 25
ID FRONT 40 50 60 70 75
REAR
1 6.00�16” X X X X X
12.4�28”
2 6.00�16” X X X X X
2

13.6�28”
3 7.50�16” X X X X X
14.9�28”
4 7.50�16” X X X X X
16.9�28”
5 6.00�16” X X X X X
14.9�28”
3

6 7.50�16” X X
13.6�28”
7 6.50�20” X X X
16.9�28”
8 7.50�16” X X
16.9�30”
4

9 6.50�20” X X X X X
16.9�30”
70�75 hp models are only available in the Heavy�Duty version
Standard/Heavy�duty rear axle, BKT conventional front tyres/BKT radial rear tyres (INDIA front rims/TITAN rear rims)
Table 26
5

ID FRONT 40 50 60 70 75
REAR
1 6.00�16” X X X X X
12.4�28”
2 6.00�16” X X X X X
13.6�28”
6

3 7.50�16” X X X X X
14.9�28”
4 7.50�16” X X X X X
16.9�28”
5 6.50�20” X X X X
16.9�30”
7

70�75 hp models are only available in the Heavy�Duty version


Standard/Heavy�duty rear axle, BKT conventional tyres (INDIA rims)
Table 27
ID FRONT 40 50 60 70 75
REAR
6.00�16”
8

1 X X X X X
12.4�28”
2 6.00�16” X X X X X
13.6�28”
3 7.50�16” X X X X X
14.9�28”
4 7.50�16” X X X X X
9

16.9�28”
5 6.50�20” X X X X
16.9�30”
70�75 hp models are only available in the Heavy�Duty version
10

8-6

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 6 08/02/2013 21.14.11


WHEELS
8.3 - TRACK WIDTH CALCULATION
8.3.1 - Minimum track width

1
Rear track width
Depending on the width of the tyres, it may not be possible to use all the track width settings listed here as the tyre may foul the
fender. Choose a track width setting that ensures sufficient clearance between the fender and the tyre.
Front track width
When the minimum front track width setting is used and the tractor is fitted with wide tyres, the steering angle will be very limited.

2
Check that the clearance between the engine hood and the fenders is sufficient. To do this, raise the tractor, and then raise and lower
the steered front wheel; swing the axle and check that there is no interference.
Front axle width (without wheels)
l for 4WD tractors: 1500 mm (50�60�70 hp)
for 2WD tractors: 1367�1428 mm (40�50�60�70 hp)

3
l

4
Fig. 253

Rear axle width (without wheels)

5
The width of the STANDARD rear axle is 1447 mm (40�50�60 hp)
The width of the HEAVY DUTY rear axle is 1540 mm (50�60�70 hp)

6
7
Fig. 254

8.3.2 - Track width adjustment


Changing the track width
The track width can be adjusted to adapt the tractor for work in different crop row spacings or with different implements, e.g. plough,
etc.
8

The tractor is available with either fixed rim wheels or adjustable track wheels. Depending on the type of tyres installed you can
can cho-
cho�
ose from among 8 available track width combinations.
The distance from the outer edge of the area illuminated by the direction indicators, the running lights, the rear sidelights and upper
reflectors to the outer edge of the tyres must not exceed 400 mm; this rule applies internationally.
The data contained in the vehicle registration document regarding the maximum track widths for use on both urban and rural public
9

roads must be respected.


After any adjustment to the track width and whenever changing the wheels, tighten the nuts and bolts to the following
required tightening torques:
l Front wheels
m For 4WD versions: M20x1.5 bolts= 36 kgm (350 Nm);
10

m For 2WD versions: M16x1.5= 24 kgm (245 Nm);

8-7

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 7 08/02/2013 21.14.11


WHEELS
l Rear wheels
m M20x1.5 bolts= 49 kgm (500 Nm);
1

m bolts M18x1.5= 36 kgm (350 Nm);

Every 20 hours of work all the bolts and nuts fixing the front and rear wheels must be tightened again to the torques specified above.
Before changing the wheels, immobilise the tractor so that it cannot move and use suitable supports.
When working with compressed air to bed in the tyre on the rim always use an extension line of sufficient length to allow you to remain
at the side of the tyre. This operation should be carried out by specially trained personnel only.
2

WARNING
When changing wheels or carrying out maintenance and repair operations, raise and support the tractor using specific
equipment only.

Variable track wheels


3

This type of adjustment is possible only when fitting wheels whose disc is screwed onto the rim.
1. Lug
2. Rim
3. Lug width
4. Disc
4
5

Fig. 255

Support lug (1) on rim (2) is welded in an offset position with respect to the centreline of the drop centre (and hence also with respect
to the tyre).
During fitting, the bracket can be mounted in contact with wheel (4) on either side, thus making it possible to achieve two alternative
track widths.
6

Two more track widths can be achieved by inverting rim (2) with respect to disc (1).
This means that there are 4 possible ways in which rim (2) can be assembled on disc (4).
If you then fit the assembled rim onto the hub (or rear half shaft) with the bell facing inwards or outwards you can achieve 8 different
configurations for the distance between the centreline of the wheel and the contact surface of the rim on the wheel hub or half shaft
flange. There are therefore 8 possible track widths.
7

Disc�rim assembly diagram for front wheels


The figure shows the 8 different ways of fitting the disc to the rim to obtain 8 different front track widths.
8
9
10

Fig. 256

8-8

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 8 08/02/2013 21.14.17


WHEELS
Disc�rim assembly diagram for rear wheels
The figure shows the 8 different ways of fitting the disc to the rim to obtain 8 different front track widths.

1
2
3
Fig. 257

WARNING
When it is necessary to extend the track width, avoid overloading the tractor.

4
Calculation of track widths obtainable with “Standard rear axle, BKT front tyres/MRF rear tyres (TITAN front rims/INDIA rear rims)”
Table 28
COMBINATION 1 FRONT 11.2-20” REAR 13.6-28”

5
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
11.2�20” - - 1460 1554 1466 1560 1660 1754
13.6�28” - - - 1412 1499 1611 1652 1764
All measurements are given in mm
Table 29

6
COMBINATION 2 FRONT 8.00-20” REAR 12.4-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
8.00�20” - - 1428 1518 1498 1588 1628 1718
12.4�28” N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
All measurements are given in mm, N.A.= Value not available

7
Table 30
COMBINATION 3 FRONT 11.2-20” REAR 14.9-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
11.2�20” - - 1460 1554 1466 1560 1660 1754
14.9�28” N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
8
All measurements are given in mm, N.A.= Value not available
Table 31
COMBINATION 4 FRONT 12.5-20” REAR 16.9-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
12.5�20”
9

- - 1460 1554 1466 1560 1660 1754


16.9�28” - - - 1415 1498 1612 1701 1815
All measurements are given in mm
10

8-9

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 9 08/02/2013 21.14.18


WHEELS
Calculation of track widths obtainable with “Heavy�duty rear axle, BKT front tyres/MRF rear tyres (TITAN front rims/INDIA rear rims)”
Table 32
1

COMBINATION 1 FRONT 11.2-20” REAR 13.6-28”


TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
11.2�20” - - 1460 1554 1466 1560 1660 1754
13.6�28” - - - 1505 1595 1708 1791 1905
All measurements are given in mm
2

Table 33
COMBINATION 2 FRONT 8.00-20” REAR 12.4-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
8.00�20” - - 1428 1518 1498 1588 1628 1718
12.4�28” N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
3

All measurements are given in mm, N.A.= Value not available


Table 34
COMBINATION 3 FRONT 11.2-24” REAR 16.9-30”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
11.2�24”
4

- - - 1454 1566 1660 1760 1854


16.9�30” - - - 1446 1653 1766 1733 1846
All measurements are given in mm
Table 35
COMBINATION 4 FRONT 11.2-20” REAR 14.9-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5

WIDTH
11.2�20” - - 1460 1554 1466 1560 1660 1754
14.9�28” N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
All measurements are given in mm, N.A.= Value not available
Table 36
6

COMBINATION 5 FRONT 12.5-20” REAR 16.9-28”


TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
12.5�20” - - 1460 1554 1466 1560 1660 1754
16.9�28” - - - 1522 1577 1691 1808 1922
All measurements are given in mm
7

Table 37
COMBINATION 6 FRONT 9.5-24” REAR 18.4-26”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
9.5�24” - - 1360 1454 1566 1660 1760 1854
18.4�26” - - - 1492 1606 1698 1800 1892
All measurements are given in mm
8

Calculation of track widths obtainable with “Standard rear axle, BKT radial tyres (TITAN rims)”
Table 38
COMBINATION 1 FRONT 9.50-20” REAR 13.6-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9

WIDTH
9.50�20” - - 1460 - 1466 1560 1660 1754
13.6�28” - - - 1411 1505 1609 1707 1811
All measurements are given in mm
Table 39
10

COMBINATION 2 FRONT 7.50-20” REAR 12.4-28”


TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
7.50�20” - - 1428 1518 1498 1588 1628 1718

8-10

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 10 08/02/2013 21.14.18


WHEELS
COMBINATION 2 FRONT 7.50-20” REAR 12.4-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1
WIDTH
12.4�28” - - 1307 1411 1505 1609 1707 1811
All measurements are given in mm
Table 40
COMBINATION 3 FRONT 11.2-20” REAR 14.9-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
WIDTH
11.2�20” - - 1460 1554 1466 1560 1660 1754
14.9�28” - - - 1411 1505 1609 1707 1811
All measurements are given in mm
Table 41

3
COMBINATION 4 FRONT 12.4-20” REAR 16.9-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
12.4�20” - - 1460 1554 1466 1560 1660 1754
16.9�28” - - - 1407 1509 1607 1709 1807
All measurements are given in mm
Calculation of track widths obtainable with “Heavy�duty rear axle, BKT radial tyres (TITAN front rims)”

4
Table 42
COMBINATION 1 FRONT 9.50-20” REAR 13.6-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
9.50�20” - - 1460 - 1466 1560 1660 1754

5
13.6�28” - - 1400 1504 1598 1702 1800 1904
All measurements are given in mm
Table 43
COMBINATION 2 FRONT 7.50-20” REAR 12.4-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH

6
7.50�20” - - 1428 1518 1498 1588 1628 1718
12.4�28” - - 1400 1504 1598 1702 1800 1904
All measurements are given in mm
Table 44
COMBINATION 3 FRONT 11.2-24” REAR 16.9-30”

7
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
11.2�24” - - - 1454 1566 1660 1760 1854
16.9�30” - - - 1502 1598 1700 1800 1902
All measurements are given in mm
Table 45
8

COMBINATION 4 FRONT 11.2-20” REAR 14.9-28”


TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
11.2�20” - - 1460 1554 1466 1560 1660 1754
14.9�28” - - 1400 1504 1598 1702 1800 1904
All measurements are given in mm
9

Table 46
COMBINATION 5 FRONT 12.4-20” REAR 16.9-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
12.4�20” - - 1460 1554 1466 1560 1660 1754
16.9�28”
10

- - - 1498 1602 1698 1802 1898


All measurements are given in mm

8-11

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 11 08/02/2013 21.14.19


WHEELS
Calculation of track widths obtainable with “Standard rear axle, conventional BKT tyres (TITAN front rims/INDIA rear rims)”
Table 47
1

COMBINATION 1 FRONT 9.50-20” REAR 13.6-28”


TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
9.50�20” - - 1460 - 1466 1560 1660 1754
13.6�28” - - - 1412 1499 1611 1652 1764
All measurements are given in mm
2

Table 48
COMBINATION 2 FRONT 7.50-20” REAR 12.4-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
7.50�20” - - 1428 1518 1498 1588 1628 1718
12.4�28” N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
3

All measurements are given in mm, N.A.= Value not available


Table 49
COMBINATION 3 FRONT 11.2-20” REAR 14.9-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
11.2�20”
4

- - 1460 1554 1466 1560 1660 1754


14.9�28” N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
All measurements are given in mm, N.A.= Value not available
Table 50
COMBINATION 4 FRONT 9.5-24” REAR 16.9-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5

WIDTH
9.5�24” N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
16.9�28” - - - 1415 1498 1612 1701 1815
All measurements are given in mm, N.A.= Value not available
Calculation of track widths obtainable with “Heavy�duty rear axle, conventional BKT tyres (TITAN front rims/INDIA rear rims)”
6

Table 51
COMBINATION 1 FRONT 9.5-20” REAR 13.6-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
9.5�24” - - 1460 - 1466 1560 1660 1754
13.6�28” N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
All measurements are given in mm, N.A.= Value not available
7

Table 52
COMBINATION 2 FRONT 8.50-20” REAR 12.4-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
7.50�20” - - 1428 1518 1498 1588 1628 1718
8

12.4�28” N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.


All measurements are given in mm, N.A.= Value not available
Table 53
COMBINATION 3 FRONT 11.2-24” REAR 16.9-30”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9

WIDTH
11.2�24” - - - 1454 1566 1660 1760 1854
16.9�30” - - - 1446 1653 1766 1733 1846
All measurements are given in mm
Table 54
10

COMBINATION 4 FRONT 11.2-20” REAR 14.9-28”


TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
11.2�20” - - 1460 1554 1466 1560 1660 1754

8-12

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 12 08/02/2013 21.14.25


WHEELS
COMBINATION 4 FRONT 11.2-20” REAR 14.9-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1
WIDTH
14.9�28” - - - 1453 1646 1760 1740 1853
All measurements are given in mm
Table 55
COMBINATION 5 FRONT 9.5-24” REAR 16.4-28”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
WIDTH
9.5�24” N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
16.4�28” - - - 1522 1577 1691 1808 1922
All measurements are given in mm, N.A.= Value not available
Front track width adjustment for 2-wheel drive tractors with extendible axle
The track width can be changed by moving the wheel hub onwards or outwards.

3
IMPORTANT:
Both wheels must be adjusted equally to maintain the balance of
the tractor.

4
To make the adjustment, proceed as follows:
l extract the retaining pin that locks the hub to the axle;
l adjust the track width to the desired width;
l put the locking pin back in.
l The figure shows the change in track width for each single hole.
Fig. 258

5
6
7
8
9
10

8-13

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 13 08/02/2013 21.14.40


WHEELS
8.4 - BALLASTING
8.4.1 - Tractor ballast
1

Front ballast
WARNING
An unbalanced tractor can overturn and cause injury and death. Make sure that the front ballast support, the ballast
weights, and the weights and the ballast on the wheels all comply with the specifications o f the manufacturer. DO
NOT add ballast to compensate for an overloaded tractor; reduce the load instead. Always keep all parts of your body
2

within the confines of the driving position when operating the tractor.
The front ballast is supplied on request:
l ballast support with cast�iron blocks
l from two to six cast iron blocks, weighing 43 kg each.
3

This gives a total of 278 kg.


Rear wheel ballast
The ballast for wheels can be of 2 different types:
l metal discs
l introduction of water into the tyres
4

8.4.2 - Front ballast with cast-iron blocks


This type of ballast is comprised of a ballast support to which cast�iron blocks can be attached. The number of blocks can vary from
two to six as required.
Each block of cast iron weighs 43 kg, thus making a maximum load of 278 kg (including the ballast support).
Front ballast
5

1.
2. Ballast support
3. Ballast pack tie rod
4. Ballast lock pin
5. Ballast hitch pin
6. Support hitch pin (to be used when no ballast blocks are attached)
6

Fig. 259
7

8.4.3 - Ballast discs for rear wheels


This type of ballast comprises two to four discs per wheel:
l each disc weighs 43 kg, giving a maximum total of 172 kg per wheel (180 kg including mounting equipment)
IMPORTANT:
8

Always ensure that same ballast weight is fitted to each rear wheels.
9
10

8-14

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 14 08/02/2013 21.14.53


WHEELS
This ballast comprises metal discs that can be fitted to the rear wheel rims.

1
2
Fig. 260

8.4.4 - Ballast for wheels with water-filled tyres

3
This type of ballast consists of introducing water into the tyres.
IMPORTANT
The amount of liquid in the tyre must not exceed 75% of the total tyre volume.

4
To prevent the water from freezing and damaging the tyres, use additives to obtain a neutralised solution of calcium chloride.
To prepare the solution, proceed as follows:
l fill a container with the quantity of water that you wish to introduce into the tyres;
l slowly pour in calcium chloride (approx. 30 kg to every 100 litres of water), stirring continuously;
l after filling the tyres, wash all the equipment used with plenty of clean water.

5
IMPORTANT
Do not pour water into concentrated calcium chloride as this may cause a violent chemical reaction.

CAUTION

6
When ballasting the tractor, load the front axle so as to ensure safe steering (the load on the front axle must not be
less than 20% of the tractor weight)

WARNING
Remember that steering, braking and performance in general will be greatly influenced by any implements/trailers
attached or ballast applied to the tractor.

7
IMPORTANT
The antifreeze solution cannot be used at temperatures below �20°C. 8
Fill the tyres with the solution by means of the specific adaptor for water injection
and extraction.
9
10

Fig. 261

8-15

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 15 08/02/2013 21.14.54


WHEELS
Filling the tyres with water.
To introduce water into the tyre, proceed as follows:
1

l Raise the tractor from the ground.


l Turn the wheel to bring the valve to the highest position.
l Unscrew the inner part of the valve.
l Fit the special adaptor for adding water ballast to the valve.
l Connect the water hose and fill until the water starts to come out of the
breather at the bottom of the valve.
2

l Remove the adapter and screw in the inner part of the valve.
l Fill the tyre with air to the specified pressure.
1. AIR
2. WATER
Fig. 262
3

CAUTION
While mixing the antifreeze solution and filling the tyres with liquid ballast, it is essential to wear safety goggles and
protective clothing. Pour the calcium chloride into the water and not vice versa.

Draining water from the tyre


4

To drain water from the tyre, proceed as follows:


l Raise the tractor from the ground.
l Turn the wheel to bring the valve to the lowest position.
l Unscrew the inner part of the valve and allow the water drain out.
l Screw the special adaptor into the valve.
l Inflate the tyre.
5

l The pressure will force all remaining water out through the breather.
l Unscrew the special adapter and screw in the inner part of the valve.
l Fill the tyre with air to the specified pressure.
1. AIR
2. WATER
6

Fig. 263
7
8
9
10

8-16

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 16 08/02/2013 21.14.54


1
2
3
4
5
9 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

6
7
8
9
10

9-1

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 1 08/02/2013 21.14.54


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.1 - BATTERY
9.1.1 - Battery
1

The tractor is fitted with a low�maintenance type battery. Therefore, under normal conditions of use, the battery does not require
topping up with electrolyte. Nevertheless, it is necessary to periodically check that the electrolyte level is between the MIN and MAX
marks on the battery.
At the start of the winter season check the battery charge level. Recharge if necessary.
WARNING
2

The terminals and some components of the battery contain lead or lead compounds. In some countries the legislation
considers these substances as a cause of cancer, birth defects and damage to the reproductive system. Wash your
hands after handling the battery.
Accessing the battery
3

The battery (1) is located in the front engine compartment, in front of the radiator
4

Fig. 264
5

To access the battery, proceed as follows:


l Press the button (1) to open the hood
6
7

Fig. 265

WARNING
Only use 12 volt chargers to charge the battery.
8

Removing and refitting the battery


WARNING
Wear safety goggles when charging or topping up the battery.
9

CAUTION
Always disconnect the battery before carrying out any work on the electrical system. Always disconnect the battery
and all the electronic control units before carrying out any welding on the tractor or any of the equipment connected
to the tractor.
10

9-2

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 2 08/02/2013 21.15.20


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
DANGER
The gases given off by the battery are highly explosive. Never cause a spark or allow a naked flame near the battery.

1
Batteries must be stored and charged in a well�ventilated environment. Take care that the acid electrolyte does not
come into contact with your skin or clothes.
To remove the battery, proceed as follows:
l disconnect the earth lead from the negative terminal;
l disconnect the power lead from the positive terminal;

2
l loosen the four screws securing the two battery retaining brackets;
l remove the battery from its support.
To refit the battery, proceed as follows:
l secure the battery to the support;
l tighten the four screws securing the two battery retaining brackets;
connect the power lead to the positive terminal;

3
l
l connect the earth lead to the negative terminal.
IMPORTANT
Never connect the power lead to the negative terminal or the earth lead to the negative terminal, as this could
seriously damage the electrical system.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

9-3

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 3 08/02/2013 21.15.21


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.2 - CAB FUSE BOX
9.2.1 - Fuse box (AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001,AGROLUX 50 E ->D10S453WT1E1001,
1

AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E ->D10S653WT1E1001)


To access the fuse box, raise the hood. The fuse box is located on the right�hand
side of the engine, near the fuel tank.
Always switch off the power before checking the fuse box or relays. If necessary,
refer to the wiring diagram located inside the fuse box cover.
2
3

Fig. 266

Before changing a blown fuse:


l disconnect the power supply
l eliminate the fault that caused the fuse to blow
4

l replace the blown fuse.


Fuse box diagram
5
6
7
8

Fig. 267 - Fuse box diagram


9
10

9-4

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 4 08/02/2013 21.15.21


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.2.2 - Fuse box (AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001)
To access the fuse box, raise the hood. The fuse box is located on the right�hand

1
side of the engine, on a bracket near the fuel tank.
Always switch off the power before checking the fuse box or relays. If necessary,
refer to the wiring diagram located on the inside of the fuse box cover.

2
Fig. 268

3
Before changing a blown fuse:
l switch off the power
l eliminate the fault that caused the fuse to blow
l replace the blown fuse.
Fuse box diagram

4
5
6
7
8
Fig. 268 - Fuse box diagram
9.2.3 - Key to fuse and relay symbols
Key to main fuse box and fuse symbols
Ignition key
9
10

9-5

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 5 08/02/2013 21.15.22


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Hazard warning lights
1

Lights
2

Engine stop - Trailer lights


3

Rear worklights
4
5

Direction indicators
6

Brake lights
7

Instrument panel
8

High beam headlights


9

Low beam headlights


10

9-6

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 6 08/02/2013 21.15.22


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Sidelights

1
Spare position - currently not utilised

2
Spare position - currently not utilised

3
Rotating beacon

4
5
Front worklights

6
Key to cab fuse box and fuse symbols
Colour of fuse box wires
Table 56
M � brown V � green Z � purple
N � black S � pink R - red

7
C - orange A - light blue B � white
L - blue G � yellow H � grey

8
9
10

9-7

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 7 08/02/2013 21.15.22


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.3 - LIGHTS FOR ROAD USE
9.3.1 - Lights for road use
1

IMPORTANT:
Clean the exterior of the lights with water or specific commercial products.

IMPORTANT
2

Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.

The tractor is equipped with the following lights for road use:
l 2 front lights (low and high beam headlights) on the front grille.
3

l 2 light clusters composed of side lights and direction indicators at the sides.
l 2 light clusters at the rear above the fenders.
l 2 reflectors on the rear of the tractor mounted on the fenders.
CAUTION
When driving at night on public roads with a front�mounted implement, the headlights will not give sufficient illumina-
4

tion (as they will be partially obscured by the implement) and it is therefore necessary to use the auxiliary driving lights.

Note:
Switch off the front and rear lights before cleaning them.
5

Front lights
The headlights for road use are equipped with H4 60/55W double filament bulbs,
to ensure both width and depth of field.
6
7

Fig. 269

Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.
8
9
10

9-8

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 8 08/02/2013 21.15.23


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
l remove the front grille;

1
l extract the connector (1) of the bulb;
l remove the protective rubber cap (2);
l slightly rotate the spring clip (3) that holds the bulb (4) in its seat and detach
it from the reflector;
l change the bulb, inserting the new one by making the positioning teeth tally
with the notches in the crown of the reflector (5);

2
l turn the spring clip (3) to lock it;
l replace the rubber cap (2), making sure that it fits snugly against the edge
of the reflector;
l insert the connector (1) on the terminals of the bulb; Fig. 270
l refit the front grille.

IMPORTANT

3
Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.

Sidelights and side direction indicators


The repeater sidelights and direction indicators are located:

4
l on the front of the fenders
l on the rear of the fenders
Lights and direction indicators on the front of the fenders.
The side lights and direction indicators are composed of two separate
bulbs enclosed in a single container on each side of the tractor:

5
l sidelight (1) equipped with bulb type DIN 72601�R5W 12V 5W
l direction indicator (2) equipped with bulb type DIN 72601�P21 12V 21W

6
Fig. 271

Bulb replacement

7
IMPORTANT:
Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.

IMPORTANT
8

Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.
9
10

9-9

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 9 08/02/2013 21.15.23


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
l using a screwdriver, loosen and remove the two screws (1) fixing the trans-
1

parent yellow�white plate (2);


l gently remove the transparent plate to access the bulbs;
l lightly press down on the bulb to be changed (3) and at the same time turn
it anti�clockwise as far as it will go;
l fit the new bulb by inserting it fully in with light pressure and turning it clock-
wise until it stops;
2

l fit the transparent plate back on and secure it with the two screws.

Fig. 272

Lights and direction indicators on the rear of the fenders.


3

The rear lights are composed of three separate bulbs enclosed in a single
container on each fender of the tractor:
1. side light � equipped with bulb type DIN 72601�R5W 12V 5W and brake
light indicating tractor braking (STOP) equipped with bulb type DIN 72601�
P21 12V 21W
2. Reversing light equipped with bulb type DIN 72601�R5W 12V 5W
4

3. direction indicator (3) equipped with bulb type DIN 72601�P21 12V 21W

Fig. 273
5

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:


IMPORTANT:
Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.
6

IMPORTANT
Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:


7

l using a screwdriver, loosen and remove the two screws (1) fixing the trans-
parent yellow�red plate (2);
l gently remove the transparent plate to access the bulbs;
l lightly press down on the bulb to be changed (3) and at the same time turn
it anti�clockwise as far as it will go;
l fit the new bulb by inserting it fully in with light pressure and turning it clock-
8

wise until it stops;


l fit the transparent plate back on and secure it with the two screws.

Fig. 274
9

9.3.2 - Headlight alignment


WARNING
The figure is applicable to countries in which vehicles circulate on the right of the road, in the case of countries with
left�hand traffic circulation the dark area on the wall must be symmetrical to the situation shown in the figure (i.e. the
points of the dark area entering the light area must always be facing the kerb).
10

To adjust the headlight aim, the tractor, in normal road transport condition, with the tyres inflated to the recommended pressures and
the front wheels in the straight�ahead position, must be parked on level ground at a distance of 10 m from a vertical wall with the low

9-10

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 10 08/02/2013 21.15.24


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
beam headlights switched on.

1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 275 - Diagram showing headlight alignment for driving on public roads
l 1 � points on the wall corresponding to the centres of the headlights
l A � distance between headlights

6
l H � height of headlights
l h � distance from beam centre with respect to horizontal axis
l x � distance from headlights to wall
Turn the adjuster screws indicated by the arrows in the figure to move the beam in a vertical or horizontal direction.
WARNING

7
In order to determine the points on the wall corresponding to the centres of the headlights, bring the tractor up to the
wall with the dipped headlights on, mark the centres (1) on the wall and then reverse to a distance of 10 m from the
wall.
Headlight horizontal adjustment
With the headlights switched on, the centres of the beams should be apart the distance A indicated in the figure.
8

Headlight vertical adjustment


With the headlights on, the lines delimiting the light and dark zones on the wall should be 10 cm apart as shown in the figure by (h).
9
10

9-11

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 11 08/02/2013 21.15.24


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.4 - WORKLIGHTS
9.4.1 - Worklights
1

IMPORTANT
Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.

The tractor is equipped with the following worklights:


2

l 2 worklights on the front grille (corner light)


l 1 worklight positioned at the rear of the tractor
CAUTION
Always use the appropriate safety lights when travelling on the public highway. Apply reflective tape and reflectors to
the tractor as required.
3

WARNING
It is not permitted to use the worklights when driving the tractor on public roads.
4

Worklights on the front grille (corner light)


The worklights on the front panel are equipped with bulbs type ECE 37 HB3 12V
55W.
1. Worklights
5
6

Fig. 276

Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.
7

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:


l Open the hood;
l Disconnect the wiring connector of the bulb holder
l remove the protective rubber cap (1);
8

l slightly rotate spring clip (2) that holds the bulb in place and remove the old
bulb from the reflector;
l fit the new bulb, aligning the locating pins with the notches in reflector
crown (3);
l turn spring clip (2) to lock it;
l refit rubber cap (1), making sure that it fits snugly against the edge of the
9

reflector;
l connect the wiring connector to the bulb terminals; Fig. 277
l close the hood.

IMPORTANT
10

Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.

9-12

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 12 08/02/2013 21.15.25


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Worklight positioned on the rear of the tractor
The rear worklight is switched on and off by way of the switch (1) mounted directly

1
on the light itself. It is fitted with a bulb type DIN 72601�H3 12V 55W.

2
Fig. 278

3
Note:
Switch off the front and rear lights before cleaning them.

Bulb replacement

4
IMPORTANT:
Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:


carefully clean the outside of the light unit to avoid the risk of dirt getting on the reflector during bulb replacement;

5
l
l Unscrew the ring nut and remove the transparent cap to access the bulb;
l Rotate the bulb and withdraw it from the bulb holder (3) ;
l fit the new bulb ;
l replace the cap and tighten the ringnut.
IMPORTANT

6
Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.

7
8
9
10

9-13

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 13 08/02/2013 21.15.25


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.5 - ACCESSORIES
9.5.1 - Installation of additional electronic components and/or equipment
1

The tractor is equipped with electronic parts and components whose functioning may be disturbed by electromagnetic emissions from
other equipment. These emissions may put people in danger if the following safety guidelines are not followed.
In the case of installation of additional electrical or electronic components that are connected to the tractor’s electrical system, the
user is responsible for checking that the installation does not release emissions which interfere with the operation of the existing
electronic or other components of the tractor.
2

This is particularly a problem with the following types of equipment:


l Radio
l CB radio receiver
l Mobile telephone (ETACS, GSM, etc.)
In particular, it is important to check that any supplementary electrical or electronic devices installed comply with the current directives
3

75/322 MOD 2001/3 and that they bear the CE marking.


As regards the installation of additional mobile telecommunications systems (e.g.: radio, telephone), the following sup-
plementary indications must be observed:
l Install only equipment licensed in conformance with the applicable regulations in your country (e.g: the BZT licence in Ger-
many).
4

l Ensure that the device/s are firmly fixed.


l The use of portable or mobile equipment inside the vehicle is permitted only if it is connected to an antenna firmly secured to
the outside of the vehicle.
l Radio transmission components must be installed separately from the vehicle’s electronic components.
The antenna must be fitted in a professional manner and there must be a good connection between the antenna and the vehicle
earthing point. The wiring, the installation and the maximum current draw must conform to the applicable requirements.
5

9.5.2 - Power outlet sockets (AGROLUX 45 E ->D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50


E ->D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E ->D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E
->D10S653WT1E1001)
Trailer power outlet socket
The trailer power outlet is provided on a 7�pin socket.
6
7

Fig. 279
8

Explanations of each pin are given below:


1. LH direction indicator
2. Not utilised
3. Earth
4. RH direction indicator
RH tail light and number plate light
9

5.
6. Brake light
7. LH tail light
10

Fig. 280

9-14

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 14 08/02/2013 21.15.25


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Outlet socket for rotating beacon
The flashing beacon is not equipped with a switch, but is activated by plugging its

1
connector into two�pin socket (1) located at the rear of the tractor next to the rear
lift cover. This socket may also be used to power other external equipment, when
necessary.

2
Fig. 281

3
1. Outlet socket for flashing beacon
2. Trailer power outlet socket

9.5.3 - Power outlet sockets (AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001)


Trailer power outlet socket
The trailer power outlet is provided on a 7�pin socket.

4
5
Fig. 282

6
Explanations of each pin are given below:
1. LH direction indicator
2. Not utilised
3. Earth
4. RH direction indicator
5. RH tail light and number plate light

7
6. Brake light
7. LH tail light

Fig. 282
8

Outlet socket for flashing beacon


The flashing beacon is not equipped with a switch, but is activated by plugging its
connector into the two�pin socket located at the rear of the tractor next to the rear
lift cover. This socket may also be used to power other external equipment when
9

necessary.
10

Fig. 283

9-15

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 15 08/02/2013 21.15.25


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK


6
7
8
9
10

9-16

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 16 08/02/2013 21.15.26


1
2
3
4
5
10 - TECHNICAL DATA

6
7
8
9
10

10-1

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 1 08/02/2013 21.15.26


TECHNICAL DATA
10.1 - TECHNICAL DATA OF THE TRACTOR
10.1.1 - Technical data
1

X - Standard O - Optional
Table 57 - Technical data
AGROLUX 45 E AGROLUX 50 E AGROLUX 60 E AGROLUX 70 E
->D10S403WX1E5001 ->D10S453WT1E1001 ->D10S553WT1E1001 ->D10S653WT1E1001
2

01 - ENGINE
Engine model 1000.3-W3 1000.3-WT3E1 1000.3-W3 1000.3-WT3E1
Cylinders/Cylinder capacity 3/3000 3/3000 3/3000 3/3000
n°/cc
Natural aspiration X X
Turbocharged aspiration X X
Max. homologated power 29,41/40 36,56/50 40,5/55 51,5/70
3

(2000/25/CE) kW/hp
Max. homologated power - - - -
kW/hp
Maximum torque Nm/kgm 142,7/14,6 177/18,5 190/19,3 180/18,3
Maximum torque speed 1405 1200 1300 1300
(rpm)
4

Torque increase 23 22
Minimum speed rpm 750 750 750 750
Maximum power engine 2200 2350 2350 2200
speed
Maximum speed in rpm 2300-2360 2490-2510 2490-2510 2300-2360
(nominal)
Mechanical engine control X X X X
5

Liquid cooled X X X X
Oil cooler X X X X
Air cleaner 7” 7” 8” 8”
Underhood silencer with X X X X
vertical exhaust pipe
02 - CLUTCH
6

Diameter in inches 11” 11” 11” 11”


No. of plates 2 2 2 2
Organic material X (Cerametallic) X (Cerametallic) X (Cerametallic) X (Cerametallic)
03 - TRANSMISSION
4 speed gearbox X X X X
7

2 Ranges X X X X
Creeper gears X X
Forced lubrication X X X X
04 - REAR PTO
Disc diameter in mm. 11” 11” 11” 11”
Shaft diameter 1” 3/8 1” 3/8 1” 3/8 1” 3/8
8

PTO shaft splines 6 6 6 6


PTO 540 – Engine rpm: X X X X
540 ECO PTO - Engine X X X X
rpm:
Engine revs/PTO revs ratio 3,6426 3,6426 3,6426 3,6426
540
Engine revs/PTO revs ratio 2,8889 2,8889 2,8889 2,8889
9

540ECO
06 - FRONT AXLE
Transmission ratio: front 1,3861 1,3861 1,3861 1,3861
wheel revs. per rear wheel
rev.
10

Steering angle / 2WD steer- 55° 55° 55° 55°


ing radius

10-2

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 2 08/02/2013 21.15.26


TECHNICAL DATA
AGROLUX 45 E AGROLUX 50 E AGROLUX 60 E AGROLUX 70 E
->D10S403WX1E5001 ->D10S453WT1E1001 ->D10S553WT1E1001 ->D10S653WT1E1001
Steering angle / 4WD steer- 40°�55° 40°�55° 40°�55° 40°�55°

1
ing radius
07 - BRAKES
Diameter of front discs mm 178 178 178 178
Diameter of rear discs in 224 224 224 224
mm

2
Parking brake X X X X
Hydraulic trailer braking X X X X
valve
Oil-immersed front disc X X X X
brakes
09 - REAR HYDRAULIC LIFT

3
Mechanically controlled X X X X
rear lift
Mechanically controlled 2250 2250 2250 2250
rear lift, maximum lifting
capacity without supple-
mentary rams

4
Right hand lifting rod and X X X X
mechanical top link
11 – SPOOL VALVES
Pump output at max. power 31 31 31 31
engine rpm l/min
Auxiliary spool valves � max 2/4 2/4 2/4 2/4

5
n° ports
12 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage [V] 12 12 12 12
Battery, standard [V/Ah/A] 12/100/450 12/100/450 12/100/450 12/100/450
Alternator [V/Ah] 14/65 14/65 14/65 14/65

6
Starter motor [V/kW] 12/2,6 12/2,6 12/2,6 12/2,6
13 - FUEL TANK
Tank capacity litres 65 65 65 65
14 - CAB / ROPS
Platform with ROPS frame X X X X

7
Maximum noise level � 84 84 84 84
ROLL BAR db(A):

8
9
10

10-3

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 3 08/02/2013 21.15.26


TECHNICAL DATA
AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001
1

01 - ENGINE
Engine model 1000.4-W4
Cylinders/Cylinder capacity n°/cc 4/4000
Natural aspiration X
Max. homologated power (2000/25/CE) kW/hp 53,7/73
Maximum torque Nm/kgm 270/27,5
2

Maximum torque speed (rpm) 1400


Torque increase 35
Minimum speed rpm 750
Maximum power engine speed 2350
Maximum speed in rpm (nominal) 2535
Mechanical engine control X
Liquid cooled X
3

Oil cooler X
Air cleaner 7”
Underhood silencer with vertical exhaust pipe X
02 - CLUTCH
Diameter in inches 11”
No. of plates 2
4

Organic material X (Cerametallic)


03 - TRANSMISSION
4 speed gearbox X
2 Ranges X
Forced lubrication X
5

04 - REAR PTO
Disc diameter in mm. 11”
Shaft diameter 1” 3/8
PTO shaft splines 6
PTO 540 – Engine rpm: X
540 ECO PTO � Engine rpm: X
Engine revs/PTO revs ratio 540 3,6426
6

Engine revs/PTO revs ratio 540ECO 2,8889


06 - FRONT AXLE
Transmission ratio: front wheel revs. per rear wheel rev. 1,3861
Steering angle / 2WD steering radius 55°
Steering angle / 4WD steering radius 40°�55°
7

07 - BRAKES
Diameter of front discs mm 178
Diameter of rear discs in mm 224
Parking brake X
Hydraulic trailer braking valve X
Oil�immersed front disc brakes X
8

09 - REAR HYDRAULIC LIFT


Mechanically controlled rear lift X
Mechanically controlled rear lift, maximum lifting capacity without 2250
supplementary rams
Right hand lifting rod and mechanical top link X
9

11 – SPOOL VALVES
Pump output at max. power engine rpm l/min 42
Auxiliary spool valves � max n° ports 2/4
12 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage [V] 12
10

Battery, standard [V/Ah/A] 12/64/410


Alternator [V/Ah] 14/65
Starter motor [V/kW] 12/2,6

10-4

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 4 08/02/2013 21.15.26


TECHNICAL DATA
AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001

1
13 - FUEL TANK
Tank capacity litres 65
14 - CAB / ROPS
Platform with ROPS frame X
Maximum noise level � ROLL BAR db(A): 84

2
10.1.2 - Fuel technical characteristics
The engines used in tractors of the SDF Group are designed to run on fuel with a minimum cetane number of 45 .
The engines are approved for use with the following fuels:
l A � European Diesel Fuel for Vehicles: EN 590 (Ann. 1)
l B � U.S. Diesel Fuel for Off�Road Applications: ASTM D 975 Grade – No 1�D (Ann. 2).

3
Using fuels with a cetane number lower than the minimum indicated number may lead to starting difficulties and noticeable emission
of white smoke, especially at low temperatures.
Diesel fuels are approved and can be used according to the following specifications:
Table 58

4
FUELS
EN 590 Annex 1
ASTM Designation: D 975 Grade�No 1�D and Grade Low Sulphur No. 1�D / Annex 2
2-D
Fuels with high sulphur content
Use only commercially available fuel with a sulphur content less than 0.5%.

5
If the recommended sulphur content value is exceeded, the time intervals for changing the oil, indicated in the maintenance tables,
must be halved.
Winter operation with diesel fuel
Addition of kerosene to diesel fuel
Special demands are made on the cold behaviour (temperature limit value of the

6
filterability) of fuels for winter operation. Suitable fuels are available at filling sta-
tions during the corresponding seasons. If only summer diesel fuel is available,
kerosene (paraffin oil) may be mixed into the diesel fuel up to 30% as shown in the
diagram, to ensure the flow capability.

7
Fig. 284

For fuel available on the U.S. market in compliance with ASTM D 975 1�D/2�D, kerosene may not be mixed.
8

A 1�1 Mixing of kerosene with Summer diesel fuel


Mixing takes place in the fuel tank: first fill with the appropriate amount of paraffin, then add the diesel fuel.
Mixing of normal petrol is not permissible for safety and technical reasons (cavitation on the injection system). Diesel fuels up to -44
°C are available for an Arctic climate. It is possible to add flow improvers to the diesel fuel. The choice of a suitable additive and the
necessary dosing and mixing procedure should take place in agreement with the fuel supplier.
9

Fuel additives
The use of fuel additives is not permitted. The flow improvers mentioned above are an exception. Use of unsuitable additives will
result in loss of warranty.
10

10-5

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 5 08/02/2013 21.15.26


TECHNICAL DATA
Ann. 1: Fuel Specifications (minimum requirements) according to EN 590:2004
Table 59
1

PROPERTIES UNITS LIMIT VALUES EN TEST METHOD


590:2004
CETANE NUMBER AT LEAST 51 EN ISO 5165:1998
CETANE INDEX AT LEAST 46 EN ISO 4264:1996
Density at 15 °C kg/m3 820 - 845 EN ISO 3675:1998 EN ISO
12185:1996/C1:2001
2

Aromatic hydrocarbons weight % max. 11 EN 12916:2000


Sulphur content mg/kg 350 (until 31.12.2004) or EN ISO 20846 EN ISO 20847 EN ISO
50.00 20884
EN ISO 20846/EN ISO 20884
Flashpoint °C at least 55 EN ISO 2719:2002
Coke residue (from 10% distillation weight % max. 0.30 EN ISO 10370:1995
residue)
3

Ash content weight % max. 0.01 EN ISO 6245:2002


Water content mg/kg max. 200 EN ISO 12937:2000
Total residue mg/kg max. 24 EN 12662:1998
Corrosion effect on copper (3 hours at Degree of corrosion Class 1 EN ISO 2160:1998
50 °C)
Oxidation stability g/m3 max. 25 EN ISO 12205:1996
4

Lubricity “wear scar diameter” (wsd µm max. 460 EN ISO 12156�1:2000


1.4) at 60 °C
Viscosity at 40°C mm2/s 2.00 - 4.50 EN ISO 3104:1996
Distillation EN ISO 3405:2000
compensated at 250 °C Volume % max. 65
compensated at 350 °C Volume % at least 85
5

95 vol. % compensated by % °C 360


Fatty Acid Methyl Ester content Volume % 5 EN 14078:2003
(FAME)
Limit of filterability (CFPP) * EN 116:1997
15.04. to 30.09. °C max. 0
01.10. up to 15.11. °C max. �10
°C max. �20
6

16.11. to 28.02.
01.03. to 14.04. °C max. �10
* data applies to the Federal Republic of Germany. National regulations may differ.
** Specifications also applicable to NATO fuel F�54
Ann. 2: Fuel Specifications (minimum requirements) according to ASTM D 975
7

Table 60
PROPERTIES UNITS. LIMIT TEST METHOD
GRADE NO. 1-D LOW GRADE NO. 2-D LOW
SULPHUR GRADE NO. SULPHUR GRADE NO.
1-D 1-D
Density at 15 °C kg/m3 max. 860* max. 860*
8

Flashpoint °C at least 38 at least 52 ASTM D 93


Water and sediments vol. % max. 0.05 max. 0.05 ASTM D 2709
Distillation range at 90% volume °C - at least 282 ASTM D 86
°C max. 288 max. 338
Viscosity at 40°C mm2/s 1.3 - 2.4 1.9 - 4.1 ASTM D 44
Ash weight % max. 0.01 max. 0.01 ASTM D 482
Sulphur
9

Grade No. 1/2�D weight % max. 0.50 max. 0.50 ASTM D 129
Low sulphur grade No. 1/2�D max. 0.05 max. 0.05 ASTM D 2622
Copper corrosion Degree of corrosion No 3 No 3 ASTM D 130
Cetane number at least 40 at least 40 ASTM D 613
Coke residue according to Rams weight % 0.15 0.35 ASTM D 524
bottom from 10% distillate residue
10

Limit of filterability °C ** max. 338


diesel fuel according to ASTM Designation D 975-02

10-6

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 6 08/02/2013 21.15.26


TECHNICAL DATA
* Minimum SDFG requirement
** Varies according to season and region.

1
10.1.3 - Biodiesel technical characteristics
The following fuels are approved for use with SAME series 1000 W engines:
l A � European Diesel Fuel for Vehicles: EN 590 (Annex 1)
l B � Biodiesel (FAME � EN 14214): is only permitted when mixed with conventional Diesel fuel (EN 590) in a percentage mass
not greater than 5% (All. 2)

2
l C � U.S. Diesel Fuel for Off�Road Applications: ASTM D 975 Grade � No 1�D and No 2�D (All. 3)
SAME series 1000 W engines are designed for use with fuels with a cetane number greater than 42.
Using fuels with a cetane number lower than the 42 may lead to starting difficulties and noticeable emission of white smoke, espe-
espe�
cially at low ambient temperatures (around �10°C).
With SDF Series 1000 W engines it is possible to use all the above-mentioned types of fuel without the need for any

3
adjustment or modification, while maintaining the same service intervals, and without any warranty limitations or noticea-
ble decline in performance.
Fuel Specifications (minimum requirements) in compliance with EN 590:2004
Table 61
PROPERTIES UNITS EN 590:2004 LIMIT VAL- TEST METHOD

4
UES
CETANE NUMBER AT LEAST 51 EN ISO 5165:1998
CETANE INDEX AT LEAST 46 EN ISO 4264:1996
Density at 15 °C kg/m3 820 - 845 EN ISO 3675:1998 EN ISO
12185:1996/C1:2001
Aromatic hydrocarbons weight % max. 11 EN 12916:2000
Sulphur content mg/kg max. 350 (until EN ISO 20846 EN ISO 20847 EN ISO

5
31.12.2004) or 50.00 20884
EN ISO 20846/EN ISO 20884
Flashpoint °C at least 55 EN ISO 2719:2002
Coke residue (from 10% distillation weight % max. 0.30 EN ISO 10370:1995
residue)
Ash content weight % max. 0.01 EN ISO 6245:2002

6
Water content mg/kg max. 200 EN ISO 12937:2000
Overall soiling mg/kg max. 24 EN 12662:1998
Corrosion effect on copper (3 h at 50 Degree of corrosion Class 1 EN ISO 2160:1998
°C)
Oxidation stability g/m3 max. 25 EN ISO 12205:1996
Lubricity “wear scar diameter” (wsd µm max. 460 EN ISO 12156�1:2000

7
1.4) at 60 °C
Viscosity at 40 °C mm2/s 2,00 � 4,50 EN ISO 3104:1996
Distillation EN ISO 3405:2000
compensated at 250 °C Volume % max. 65
compensated at 350 °C Volume % at least 85
95 % vol. compensated at % °C 360
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester content Volume % EN 14078:2003
8
5
(FAME)
Limit of filterability (CFPP) * EN 116:1997
15.04. up to 30.09. °C max. 0
01.10. up to 15.11. °C max. �10
16.11. up to 28.02. °C max. �20
01.03. up to 14.04. °C max. �10
9

* Data applies to the Federal Republic of Germany. National regulations may differ.
** Specification also applied to NATO fuel F�54
10

10-7

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 7 08/02/2013 21.15.27


TECHNICAL DATA
Ann. 3 : Fuel specification (minimum requirements) Fatty Acid Methyl Ester (FAME) for diesel engines
in accordance with EN 14214
1

Table 62
PROPERTIES UNITS OF MEASURE- LIMIT VALUES EN TEST METHOD
MENT 14214:2003
Ester content weight % at least 96.5 EN 14103
Density at 15 °C kg/m3 860 - 900 EN ISO 3675 1998 EN ISO
12185:1996/C1:2001
2

Viscosity at 40 °C mm2/s 3,5 � 5,0 EN ISO 3104:1998/C2:1999


Flashpoint °C at least 120 prEN ISO 3679:2002
Sulphur content mg/kg max. 10.0 prEN ISO 20846:2002 prEN ISO
20884:2002
Coke residue (from 10% distillation weight % max. 0.30 EN ISO 10370:1995
residue)
3

Cetane number at least 51 EN ISO 51165:1998


Ash content (sulphate ash) weight % max. 0.02 ISO 3987:1994
Water content mg/kg max. 500 EN ISO 12937:2000
Overall soiling mg/kg max. 24 EN ISO 12662:1998
Corrosion effect on copper (3 h at 50 Degree of corrosion Class 1 EN ISO 2160:1998
°C)
4

Oxidation stability Hours at least 6 EN 14112


Acid number mg KOH/g max. 0.5 EN 14104
Iod number G Iod/100g max. 120 EN 14111
Content of linolenic acid-methylester weight % max. 12.0 EN 14103
Content of fatty acid�methylester with weight % max. 1
4 double bonds
Methanol content weight % max. 0.20 EN 14110
5

Monoglyceride content weight % max. 0.80 EN 14105


Diglyceride content weight % max. 0.20 EN 14105
Triglyceride content weight % max. 0.20 EN 14105
Content of free glycerine weight % max. 0.020 EN 14105 EN 14106
Content of total glycerine weight % max. 0.25 EN 14105
Content of alkaline metals (Na+K) mg/kg max. 5.0 EN 14108 EN 14109
6

Content of alkaline earth metals mg/kg max. 5.0 EN 14108:2002


Phosphor content mg/kg max. 10.0 EN 14107
Limit of filterability (CFPP) * EN 116:1997
15.04. up to 30.09. °C max. 0
* Data applies to the Federal Republic of Germany. National regulations may differ.
Annex 2 : Fuel Specifications (minimum requirements) according to ASTM D 975
7

Table 63
PROPERTIES’ UNITS OF MEASURE- LIMIT TEST METHOD
MENT GRADE NO. 1-D LOW GRADE NO.2-D LOW
SULPHUR GRADE NO. SULPHUR GRADE NO.
1-D 1-D
Density at 15 °C kg/m3 max. 860* max. 860*
8

Flashpoint °C at least 38 at least 52 ASTM D 93


Water and sediments vol. % max. 0.05 max. 0.05 ASTM D 2709
Distillation range at 90% vol °C - at least 282 ASTM D 86
°C max. 288 max. 338
Viscosity at 40 °C mm2/s 1,3 � 2,4 1,9 � 4,1 ASTM D 44
Ash weight % max. 0.01 max. 0.01 ASTM D 482
9

Sulphur
Grade No. 1/2�D weight % max. 0.50 max. 0.50 ASTM D 129
Grade Low Sulphur No. 1/2�D max. 0.05 max. 0.05 ASTM D 2622
Copper corrosion Degree of corrosion No. 3 No. 3 ASTM D 130
Cetane number at least 40 at least 40 ASTM D 613
Coke residue according to Rams- weight % 0,15 0,35 ASTM D 524
10

bottom from 10% distillate residue


Limit of filterability °C ** max. 338

10-8

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 8 08/02/2013 21.15.27


TECHNICAL DATA
diesel fuel according to ASTM Designation D 975-02
* Minimum DEUTZ requirement

1
** Depending on season and region.
10.1.4 - Coolant
Protective fluid and antifreeze
Use an appropriate type of coolant to avoid damage to the engine.
The antifreeze indicated in the lubricants table. Aqueous solutions of this fluid act both as an antifreeze and coolant, and also inhibit

2
corrosion of the metal parts of the engine cooling system. The antifreeze fluid does not contain nitrites, amines or phosphates (NAP
free).
The cooling system must be checked periodically.
Characteristics and performance
l Corrosion protection

3
m Reduces premature damage and the consequent need for replacement of cooling�system components. Maintains the

efficiency of the cooling system by guarding against the formation of deposits and encrustations.
l Optimises heat transfer
m Reduces the time taken for the engine to warm up thereby improving power and efficiency

l Lowers the freezing point

4
m Prevents expensive repairs caused by the breakage of cooling system parts.

l Raises the boiling point


m Reduces the risk of overheating in harsh conditions.

l NAP free
m Very low environmental impact. Advanced corrosion inhibitor technology for effective protection of engine components.

l Hard water stability

5
m Maintains optimal characteristics even when diluted with tap water.

l Formulated for extended life


m Ready for use; reduces the possibility of dilution errors.

Technical data
This liquid coolant meets the most recent international standards:

6
Table 64
BS 6580 (1992)
AFNORNFR 15�601 (1991)
ASTM D 3306
It is approved by or meets the specifications of the major manufacturers:

7
Table 65
KHD meets H�LV 0161 0188BS 6580 (1992)
MAN 324 NF
Mercedes Benz 325.0 ; DBL 7700.00
Scania meets TB 1451
8
Volvo meets 1286083
Deutsche Bundeswehr TK-BA2-3-6850-008
Typical chemical and physical characteristics
Table 66
Appearance Clear liquid
9

colour Blue/green
Density at 20°C ASTM D 1122 1.120 � 1.124 g/cm3
Viscosity at 20 °C DIN 51 562 3.8�4.8 mm2/s
Boiling point ASTM D 1120 >150 °C
pH ASTM D 1287 >8
Miscibility with water Totally miscible
10

Miscilibility with hard water No precipitation


Miscibility with other antifreezes Miscible with other commercially available products
Freeze point ASTM D 1177 �40 °C

10-9

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 9 08/02/2013 21.15.27


TECHNICAL DATA
Setting point DIN 51 583 < �45 °C
Freeze protection (the level of freeze protection is obtained by Down to �41.5 °C
1

calculating the arithmetic mean between the freezing point and


the setting point.)
Rubber swelling 80 °C / 168 h � SBR and EPDM (50% in water) 0 � 3% result similar to that obtained with pure water
IMPORTANT
For temperatures below �35 °C please consult an authorised service centre.
2

Safety information
The FLUID dos not contain inhibited mono�ethylene glycol and is classified as “harmful if ingested”. It is not classified as inflamma-
inflamma�
ble but may burn if ignited. The concentrated antifreeze fluid contains 25 ppm by weight of an agent that confers a bitter taste as a
deterrent against accidental ingestion. This agent is only effective in the concentrated product. In the diluted form it is necessary to
3

add 25�30 ppm by weight to obtain the same effects.


4
5
6
7
8
9
10

10-10

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 10 08/02/2013 21.15.32


TECHNICAL DATA
10.2 - DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
10.2.1 - Dimensions and weights of the tractor

1
Dimensions
Table 67 - Technical data
AGROLUX 45 E AGROLUX 50 E AGROLUX 60 E AGROLUX 70 E
->D10S403WX1E5001 ->D10S453WT1E1001 ->D10S553WT1E1001 ->D10S653WT1E1001

2
TYRES
With 2WD front tyres 6.00R16 7.50R16 7.50R16 7.50R16
With front tyres 12.4R20 12.4R20 12.4R20
With rear tyres 12.4R28 16.9R28 16.9R28 16.9R28
DIMENSIONS
2WD wheelbase (A) mm

3
2045 2045 2037 2037
Wheelbase (A) mm 1975 1975 1975
Length (B) mm 3468 3468 3315 3315
Height ( C) mm 1506 1506 1506 1506
Min�max width (D) 1620-1972 1985-2285 1969-2269 1985-2285
2WD Ground clearance 400 400 400 400
(E) mm

4
Ground clearance (F) mm 400 400 400
2WD Front track width (G) 1430 1430 1430 1430
mm
Front track width (H) mm 1750 1460 1750
Rear track width (I) mm 1498 1498 1498 1498
UNLADEN WEIGHT [2]

5
2WD � Unladen weight on 840 840 840 840
front axle kg. Low
2WD � Unladen weight on 1580 1580 1580 1580
rear axle kg Low
2WD � Total unladen weight 2420 2420 2420 2420
kg Low
Unladen weight on front

6
1030 1030 1030
axle kg.
Unladen weight on rear 1520 1520 1520
axle kg.
Total unladen weight kg. 2550 2550 2550
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT

7
2WD � Maximum permis- 1000 1000 1000 1000
sible weight on front axle kg
2WD � Maximum permis- 2700 2700 2700 2700
sible weight on rear axle kg
2WD � Maximum permis- 3800 3800 3800 3800
sible weight kg
Maximum permissible
8
1600 1200 1600
weight on front axle kg.
Maximum permissible 3000 2700 3000
weight on rear axle kg.
Total maximum permissible 4800 4300 4800
weight kg.
9

AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001

TYRES
10

With 2WD front tyres 7.50R16


With front tyres 12.4R20
With rear tyres 16.9R28

10-11

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 11 08/02/2013 21.15.33


TECHNICAL DATA
AGROLUX 4.80 E ->D10S714WT1E10001
1

DIMENSIONS
2WD wheelbase (A) mm 2160
Wheelbase (A) mm 2105
Length (B) mm 3445
Height ( C) mm 1506
Min�max width (D) 1985-2285
2

2WD Ground clearance (E) mm 400


Ground clearance (F) mm 400
2WD Front track width (G) mm 1430
Front track width (H) mm 1750
Rear track width (I) mm 1498
UNLADEN WEIGHT [2]
3

2WD � Unladen weight on front axle kg. Low 840


2WD � Unladen weight on rear axle kg Low 1580
2WD � Total unladen weight kg Low 2420
Unladen weight on front axle kg. 1150
Unladen weight on rear axle kg. 1670
Total unladen weight kg. 2820
4

MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT


2WD � Maximum permissible weight on front axle kg 1000
2WD � Maximum permissible weight on rear axle kg 2700
2WD � Maximum permissible weight kg 3800
Maximum permissible weight on front axle kg. 2200
Maximum permissible weight on rear axle kg. 3000
Total maximum permissible weight kg. 4800
5
6
7
8

Fig. 285 - Dimensions


Tractor speeds (km/h)
9

Gearbox with 12 forward and 3 reverse speeds (4 forward ratios + 1 reverse ratio
x 2 ranges + creeper)
Gearbox with 8 forward and 2 reverse speeds (4 forward ratios + 1 reverse ratio
x 2 ranges)
10

10-12

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 12 08/02/2013 21.15.33


TECHNICAL DATA
Table 68
FORWARD GEARS 14.9R28 16.9R28 16.9R30

1
*1 SR (only with 12�speed 0.77 0.80 0.83
transmission)
*2 SR (only with 12�speed 1.18 1.23 1.28
transmission)
*3 SR (only with 12�speed 1.97 2.04 2.12
transmission)

2
*4 SR (only with 12�speed 2.72 2.82 2.92
transmission)

1 SLW 2.76 2.87 2.97


2 SLW 4.16 4.32 4.48
3 SLW 6.91 7.18 7.44

3
4 SLW 8.77 9.10 9.44

1 FAST 9.71 10.09 10.46


2 FAST 13.41 13.93 14.44
3 FAST 22.28 23.13 23.99
4 FAST 32.55 32.55 33.75

4
Table 69
REVERSE GEARS 14.9R28 16.9R28 16.9R30
*1 SR (only with 12�speed -1.24 -1.29 -1.34
transmission)
2 SLW -4.37 -4.54 -4.71
3 FAST -14.11 -14.66 -15.20

5
IMPORTANT
To obtain the corresponding speeds in mph, multiply the speed values in km/h by 0.6214

6
7
8
9
10

10-13

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 13 08/02/2013 21.15.33


TECHNICAL DATA
10.3 - IMPLEMENT ATTACHMENT DIAGRAMS
10.3.1 - Implement coupling holes diagram
1

Attachment of implements to the tractor


To allow full use in the widest possible range of applications, the structural frame of the tractor has been designed to afford a solid,
safe mounting for agricultural or semi�industrial implements; this ensures the maximum versatility of the tractor in a broad range of
operating situations.
In the case of particularly heavy applications, contact your authorised service centre to check suitability.
2

It is possible that some of the tyres we fit to the tractor are not suitable for the application in question.
Before attaching the implement, check that the tyres are capable of supporting the load.
Check the markings on the tyre walls and consult the tyre manufacturer’s load tables.
Implement coupling holes diagram for 40-50-60 hp tractors with standard rear axle
3
4
5
6

Fig. 286 - Implement coupling holes diagram


7

Screw sizes
Table 70
POSITION NUMBER TYPE
A0 12 M14x2x26
B0 2+2 M18x2.5x30
8

C0 2+2 M18x2.5x25
D0 2+2 M16x2x28
E0 3+3 M16x2x25
F0 14+14 M16x2x32
G0 12 M16x2x32
H0 4 M16x2x28
9
10

10-14

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 14 08/02/2013 21.15.36


TECHNICAL DATA
Implement coupling holes diagram for 50-60-70 hp tractors with Heavy-duty rear axle

1
2
3
4
Fig. 287 - Implement coupling holes diagram

5
Screw sizes
Table 71
POSITION NUMBER TYPE
A0 12 M14x2x26
B0 2+2 M18x2.5x30
C0 2+2 M18x2.5x25

6
D0 2+2 M16x2x28
E0 3+3 M16x2x25
F0 12+12 M16x2x32
G0 12 M16x2x32
H0 4 M16x2x28

7
8
9
10

10-15

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 15 08/02/2013 21.15.38


TECHNICAL DATA
Implement coupling holes diagram for 75 hp tractors with Heavy-Duty rear axle
1
2
3
4

Fig. 288 - Implement coupling holes diagram


5

Screw sizes
Table 72
POSITION NUMBER TYPE
A0 12 M14x2x26
B0 2+2 M18x2.5x30
C0 2+2 M18x2.5x25
6

D0 2+2 M16x2x28
E0 3+3 M16x2x25
F0 12+12 M16x2x32
G0 12 M16x2x28
H0 4 M16x2x28
7
8
9
10

10-16

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 16 08/02/2013 21.15.40


INDEX


“EEC” automatic towing hitch 4-44
“EEC” towing hitch 4-42
“KAB XH2” seat 3-6

3
3�point linkage 4�25, 4�25

A
Accelerator pedal 3-27
Access to the driving position 3�4, 3�4
Accessing the engine compartment 6�11, 6�11
Accessories 9-14
Accident prevention and personal safety 2-7
Adhesive safety warning decals 2-17
Adjusting the clutch pedal 6-34
Auxiliary equipment 2-10
Auxiliary hydraulic control valve 4-28

B
Ballast discs for rear wheels 8-14
Ballast for wheels with water�filled tyres 8-15
Ballasting 8-14
Battery 9�2, 9�2
Biodiesel technical characteristics 10-7
Bleeding air and draining water from the fuel filters (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 6-45
E �>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)
Bleeding the fuel circuit (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6-47
Bleeding the hydraulic braking system 6-58
Boarding and alighting from the tractor 2-8
Brake pedal 3-25
Brakes troubleshooting 7-7
Brakes, “SEPARATE BRAKES” Valve 4-13
Braking 4-13

C
Cab fuse box 9-4
Category “A” drawbar” 4-41
Category II drilled drawbar 4-46
Changing the coolant and flushing the circuit (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6-50
Changing the coolant and flushing the circuit (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E 6-49
�>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)
Changing the differential oil, planetary reduction unit oil and side final drives oil (4WD) 6-55
Changing the engine oil 6-24
Changing the engine oil filter cartridge 6-25
Changing the fuel filter (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6-29
Changing the fuel filter cartridges (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E 6-27
�>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)
Changing the gearbox oil filter (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, 6-30
AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)
Changing the transmission oil (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6-53
Changing the transmission oil (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001,AGROLUX 50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, 6-51
AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)
Changing the transmission oil filters (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6-31
Check the battery 6-21
Check the electrical system 6-16
Checking and cleaning the radiator (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6-27

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 1 08/02/2013 21.15.41


INDEX
Checking and cleaning the radiator (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E 6-26
�>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)
Checking brake reservoir oil level 6-21
Checking engine drivebelt tension 6-23
Checking indicator lights 2-10
Checking the braking distance 6-23
Checking the braking system with safety brakes valve 6-36
Checking the coolant level (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6-13
Checking the coolant level (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, 6-13
AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)
Checking the differential lock system 6-36
Checking the engine oil level 6-12
Checking the front axle oil level (4WD) 6-34
Checking the fuel level (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6-14
Checking the fuel level (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, 6-13
AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)
Checking the oil pipelines 6-33
Checking the parking brake lever 6-33
Checking the protective structure and seat belt 6-17
Checking the steering box oil level (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E 6-56
�>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)
Checking the transmission oil level 6-18
Checking wheels and tyres 6-22
Class “C” towing hitch 4-41
Class “C” towing hitch with rapid height adjustment 4-41
Cleaning engine air filter (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, 6-38
AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)
Cleaning engine air filter (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6-42
Cleaning the tractor 2-9
Clutch control pedal 3-25
CMVR seat 3-5
Console switches 3-18
Control pedals 3-25
Coolant 10-9
Correspondence between the control levers and the hydraulic service couplers (AGROLUX 4.80 E 4-34
�>D10S714WT1E10001)
Correspondence between the control levers and the rear hydraulic couplers (AGROLUX 45 E 4-33
�>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001,
AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)
Coupling and uncoupling of PTO�driven implements 4-19

D
Daily intervention 6-12
Dimensions and weights 10-11
Dimensions and weights of the tractor 10-11
Dismounting from the tractor safely 4-8
Driving on the road 2-11

E
Electrical system troubleshooting 7-11
Emergency stop 2-16
Engaging front�wheel drive 4-11
Engine � first 50 operating hours 4-2
Engine identification plate 1-3
Engine number 1-3
Engine troubleshooting 7-2
Exposure to noise 2-7
Exterior views of the tractor 3-2
External rear�view mirrors 3-11
External views of the tractor 3-2

F
Fault diagnosis 7-12
Fluids / lubricants and fill volumes 6-4
Four�wheel drive � Differential lock 4-11

II

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 2 08/02/2013 21.15.41


INDEX
Front and rear differential locks 4-11
Front ballast with cast�iron blocks 8-14
Front towing hitch 4-46
Front wheel hub bearings (2WD) 6-36
Front�wheel drive troubleshooting 7-6
Fuel injection pump maintenance 6-38
Fuel technical characteristics 10-5
Fuse box (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 9-4
Fuse box (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 9-4
E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)

G
Gearbox troubleshooting 7-4
General information regarding tyres 8-2
General inspection of the tractor 6-12
General maintenance 6-58
General safety rules 2-4
GRAMMER MSG83/721” seat with mechanical suspension and PVC upholstery 3-7
Grease the 4WD front axle 6-20
Grease the rear axle 6-18
Greasing the pivot system of the 2WD front axle 6-19
Greasing the rear 3�point linkage 6-22

H
Handover of the tractor to the customer F1�1
Hazard warning triangle 3-23
Headlight alignment 9-10
Hydraulic lift 4-21
Hydraulic rear lift 4-21
Hydraulic remote valves troubleshooting 7-10
Hydraulic system 4-28
Hydraulic system (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 4-28
Hydraulic system (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, AGRO- 4-28
LUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)
Hydraulic system troubleshooting 7-9

I
Identification plates 1-3
Implement attachment diagrams 10-14
Implement coupling holes diagram 10-14
Important F1�1
Installation of additional electronic components and/or equipment 9-14
Instrument panel 3-14
Instruments and tractor controls 3�13, 3�13
Introduction 2�2, 4�2, 8�2

K
Key to fuse and relay symbols 9-5

L
Lift troubleshooting 7-8
Lights for road use 9�8, 9�8
List of model serial numbers 1-2

M
Maintenance and inspection schedule (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 6-9

III

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 3 08/02/2013 21.15.41


INDEX
Maintenance and inspection schedule (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E 6-7
�>D10S453WT1E1001, AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)
Maintenance at 100 hours (1st service) 6-23
Maintenance every 1200 hours or at least every two years 6-49
Maintenance every 1200 hours or at least once a year 6-38
Maintenance every 300 hours 6-34
Maintenance every 50 hours 6-18
Maintenance every 600 hours 6-36
Maintenance intervals 6-3
Maintenance operations 6-2
Mechanical hand throttle lever 3-27
Minimum track width 8-7

O
Operation 2-10
Operations prior to long term garaging 5-2
Operator seat 3-5
Operator seats 3-5
Original spare parts 1-5
Other controls 3-25
Overturning 2-12

P
Parking brake lever 3-26
Parking the tractor 2-8
Passenger seats 3-9
Permissible tyre combinations 8-4
Power outlet sockets (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 9-15
Power outlet sockets (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, 9-14
AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)
Power take�off troubleshooting 7-5
Practical advice on safe working procedures 2-3
Preface F1�1
Preparing the tractor for use after a long period of inactivity 5-3
Protect the Environment 2-3
Protective structure and seat belt 2�14, 3�22

R
Rear lift with mechanical “LOAD SENSING” control 4-21
Rear PTO 4�15, 4�15
Rear�view mirrors 3-11
Remote control valve operation 4-35
Remote valve controls (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 4-33
Remote valve controls (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, 4-32
AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)
Repairs and maintenance in safety 2-15
Right-hand console 3-21
Roll bar identification plate 1-4
Roll�over protective structure (R.O.P.S.) 2-14

S
Safety clothing and equipment 2-7
Safety warning notices 2-17
Seat belt 2-14
Seat belt 3-9
Service intervals 6-6
Set engine valves clearance and fuel injectors 6-36
Starter motor maintenance 6-48
Starting - Stopping the engine 4-3
Starting fluids 2-10
Starting the engine (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 4-5
Starting the engine (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, 4-3
AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)

IV

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 4 08/02/2013 21.15.42


INDEX
Stopping the engine 4-7

T
Technical data 10-2
Technical data of the tractor 10-2
To the owner of the new tractor F1�1
Tool box 3-23
Towing devices 4�40, 4�40
Towing safely 2-11
Track width adjustment 8-7
Track width calculation 8-7
Tractor ballast 8-14
Tractor identification plate 1-3
Tractor serial number 1-3
Transmission 4�10, 4�10
Transmission controls 3-28
Turbocharging using the turbocharger 4-8
Types of remote control valve (AGROLUX 4.80 E �>D10S714WT1E10001) 4-31
Types of remote control valve (AGROLUX 45 E �>D10S403WX1E5001, AGROLUX 50 E �>D10S453WT1E1001, 4-30
AGROLUX 60 E �>D10S553WT1E1001, AGROLUX 70 E �>D10S653WT1E1001)
Tyre combinations 8-4

W
Warnings F1�1
Washing the tractor/attached implements 6-3
Wheel chock 3-23
Worklights 9�12, 9�12

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 5 08/02/2013 21.15.42


307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 1 08/02/2013 21.15.42
307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 2 08/02/2013 21.15.42
*307.U.0280.en.6.05*
01/2013

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 3 08/02/2013 21.15.42


*307.U.0280.en.6.05*
01/2013

SAME DEUTZ-FAHR ITALIA S.p.A.


Viale F. Cassani, 15 • 24047 Treviglio (BG) • Italy • Phone + 39.0363.4211 • Fax + 39.0363.421638
www.samedeutz-fahr.com

307.U.0280.en.6.05.indb 4 08/02/2013 21.15.42

You might also like